PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Book Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 10 Agriculture Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Agriculture Guide for Class 10 PSEB Rabi Crops Textbook Questions and Answers

(A) Answer in one-two words:

Question 1.
Name any two oilseed crops.
Answer:
Raya, Linseed.

Question 2.
Name any two improved varieties of wheat.
Answer:
H.D. 2967, DBW 17.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 3.
How much seed is required to sow one acre of Raya?
Answer:
1.5 kg seed per acre.

Question 4.
Name two insect-pests of gram.
Answer:
Termite and gram caterpillar.

Question 5.
Name any two diseases of wheat.
Answer:
Kamal Bunt, yellow rust.

Question 6.
Name any two weeds of wheat
Answer:
Canary grass (gullidanda), Senji (sweet clover), Maina (toothed bur clover), Maini.

Question 7.
Which crop is known as king of fodders?
Answer:
Berseem.

Question 8.
What is the sowing time of lentil?
Answer:
Second fortnight of October.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 9.
Name any two improved varieties of barley.
Answer:
PL 807, PL 426.

Question 10.
How much is the oil content in sunflower seeds? Or What percent of oil found in sunflower seeds?
Answer:
40-43%.

(B) Answer in one-two sentences:

Question 1.
Write the per acre nutrient requirement of wheat.
Answer:
50 kg nitrogen, 25 kg phosphorus and 12 kg potash per acre.

Question 2.
Name two wheat based crop rotations.
Answer:
Rice-wheat, cotton-wheat.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 3.
In which crop and against which weeds herbicide Total is used?
Answer:
Total is used in wheat for gullidanda.

Question 4.
When should oats be harvested for fodder?
Answer:
Harvesting of oats should be done from boot to milk stage.

Question 5.
How to control itsit in berseem?
Answer:
Those fields where itsit is a problem, sow Berseem mixed with Raya and in the fields where itsit is a problem sowing should be delayed and done in second week of October.

Question 6.
When should sunflower be harvested?
Answer:
When heads turn yellowish brown at lower side and discs start drying up then the crop is ready for harvesting.

Question 7.
What is canola sarson?
Answer:
Gobhisarson is Canola Sarson.

Question 8.
Write the time and method of sowing of barley.
Answer:
Time of sowing for barley is 15 October to 15 November. Spacing for normal sowing should be 22.5 cm and for rainfed and late-sown crop spacing should be 18-20 cm. It can be sown like wheat without ploughing i. e. without any preparatory tillage.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 9.
Write the sowing time and per acre seed rate of desi gram.
Answer:
For rain fed crop time of sowing is 10 to 25 October and for irrigated conditions crop, time of sowing is 25 October to 10 November. Seed rate is 15-18 kg per acre.

Question 10.
Which soils are not suitable for lentil?
Answer:
Saline, alkaline or waterlogged soils are not suitable for lentil.

(C) Answer in five-six sentences:

Question 1.
Write the sowing time and sowing methods of wheat.
Answer:
Optimum time for sowing wheat is from fourth week of October to fourth week of November. If sowing is delayed then the yield is reduced by 150 kg per acre per week.

Method of sowing:
Wheat is sown using seed-cum-fertilizer drill. Row spacing should be 20 to 22 cm and sowing should be done at a depth of 4-6 cm. Sowing should be done by using bi-directional method. This means use half seed and half fertilizer should be used in one direction and other halves on the other side at right angle to the 1st one. This will help in increasing the yield by 2 quintals per acre. Bed planter can be used to sow wheat on beds. In this method seed rate is 30 kg per acre and water requirement is also reduced.

Question 2.
Give methods of sowing of berseem.
Answer:
Suitable time of sowing for Berseem is last week of September to first week of October. Berseem is sown in standing water using broadcast method. If there is high wind, seed should be broadcasted in dry field and then use raking and irrigation.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 3.
Give importance of sulphur in oil seeds and name its sources.
Answer:
Usually, there is less need of sulphur for plants. But oil seed crops require more sulphur. In case of deficiency of sulphur yield is reduced. Use of sulphur is necessary for the use of nitrogen. For proper activity of enzymes and for synthesis of oil sulphur is necessary. Therefore superphosphate should be given in preference for phosphorus because it also contains sulphur. If this fertilizer is not available then use 50 kg gypsum per acre.

Question 4.
Name varieties of raya and give its nutrition requirement.
Answer:
Varieties: RLC-1, PBR-210, PBR-91.

Fertilizers:
40 kg nitrogen and 12 kg phosphorus per acre is required. Use potash after testing the soil. This is a oil seed crop and also require sulphur. Therefore use single super phosphate for phosphorus since it also contains sulphur. If this fertilizer is not available use 50 kg gypsum per acre.

Question 5.
Name broadleaf weeds of wheat and give their control measure.
Answer:
Broadleaf weeds which can infest in wheat are-Bathu, Button booti, Kandiali Palak, Maina, Maini, senji.

These weeds can be controlled by using 2, 4-D, Nomor, Algrip, Aim etc. Overdosing 2,4-D should be avoided if PBW 343 variety of wheat is sown. In case of broadleaf crops are sown in wheat then also avoid 2, 4-D.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Guide Rabi Crops Important Questions and Answers

Multiple Choice Questions
Question 1.
Rabi crops are:
(a) food grains
(b) pulses
(c) oil seed and fodder
(d) All.
Answers:
(d) All.

Question 2.
Improved variety of wheat:
(a) H.D. 2967
(b) PBW 343
(c) Durum
(d) All.
Answers:
(d) All.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 3.
Diseases of wheat are:
(a) powdery mildew
(b) loose smut
(c) kamal bunt
(d) All.
Answers:
(d) All.

Question 4.
Time of sowing for barley:
(а) 15 October to 15 November
(b) July
(c) 15 January to 15 February
(d) None.
Answers:
(а) 15 October to 15 November

Question 5.
Variety of Kabuli grams:
(a) PBG 1
(b) L-552
(c) GPF 2
(d) PDG-4
Answers:
(b) L-552

Question 6.
Seed rate for sunflower per acre:
(a) 5 kg
(b) 10 kg
(c) 2 kg
(d) 25 kg.
Answers:
(c) 2 kg

Question 7.
Which crop is called “King of the fooder”?
(a) Maize
(b) Clover (Berseem)
(c) Oat
(d) Lucerne.
Answers:
(b) Clover (Berseem)

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

True or False

1. China is the leading country in the production of wheat.
Answers:
True

2. Cool climate is suitable for wheat.
Answers:
True

3. Topic can not be used for gullidanda.
Answers:
False

4. Average yield of Barley is 15-16 quintal per acre.
Answers:
True

5. Shaftal is fodder crop of Rabi.
Answers:
True

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Fill in the blanks:

1. Seed rate for wheat crop is …………… kg seed per acre.
Answers:
40

2. Zinc Sulphate is used to cure deficiency of …………………. .
Answers:
Zinc
3. ………….. country is highest producer of barley.
Answers:
Rusian federation

4. Bathu is …………… leaf weed.
Answers:
Broad

5. O.L.-9 is variety of …………….. .
Answers:
Oats.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
How many categories are there for Rabi crops?
Answer:
Three categories-cereals, pulses and oilseed, fodder crop.

Question 2.
Which country is the highest producer of wheat?
Answer:
China.

Question 3.
Which state in India is highest producer of wheat? Or Which state has highest wheat production in India?
Answer:
Uttar Pradesh.

Question 4.
How much land is under the cultivation of wheat?
Answer:
35 lakh hectare.

Question 5.
What is the yield of wheat in Punjab?
Answer:
18-20 quintal per acre on average basis.

Question 6.
Name crop rotations for wheat.
Answer:
Maize-wheat, Mash-wheat, groundnut-wheat.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 7.
Which variety of wheat is used for making Pasta?
Answer:
Durum wheat.

Question 8.
Which herbicide is used before sowing wheat, if there is problem of weeds? ’
Answer:
Use gramoxone before sowing. .

Question 9.
Which machine is used for direct sowing of wheat in combine harvested paddy fields?
Answer:
Happy seeder.

Question 10.
What is seed rate for wheat?
Answer:
40 kg per acre.

Question 11.
If sowing of wheat is delayed for a week, what is the effect on yield?
Answer:
Yield is reduced by 150 kg per acre per week.

Question 12.
How much yield is increased by bi-directional sowing of wheat?
Answer:
2 quintal per acre.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 13.
How is wheat sowed on beds?
Answer:
By using bed planter.

Question 14.
How will you control gullidanda in wheat? Name two herbicides for this.
Answer:
Topic, Leader, Treflan.

Question 15.
Name broad leaf weeds.
Answer:
Bathu, Kandiyali, Palak (golden dock), Maina, Maini, Senji, button booti.

Question 16.
In which type of soils, deficiency of zinc occurs?
Answer:
In light textured soils.

Question 17.
Which fertilizer is used if deficiency of zinc is found?
Answer:
Zinc sulphate.

Question 18.
Which fertilizer is used as a remedy for deficiency of manganese?
Answer:
Manganese sulphate.

Question 19.
How many irrigations are required for wheat?
Answer:
4-5 irrigations.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 20.
Which country is highest producer of barley?
Answer:
Rusian federation.

Question 21.
In which state is the production of barley highest in India?
Answer:
Rajasthan.

Question 22.
What is the area under the cultivation of barley?
Answer:
12 thousand hectare.

Question 23.
What is average yield of Barley?
Answer:
15-16 quintal per acre.

Question 24.
Give crop rotations for barley.
Answer:
Paddy-barley, Cetton-Barley, Bajra-Barley.

Question 25.
Name improved varieties of Barley.
Answer:
PL 807, VJM 201, PL 426.

Question 26.
What is seed rate of barley for irrigated crop?
Answer:
35 kg per acre.

Question 27.
Which weedicide is used to control jaundhar (wild oats) weed in Barley?
Answer:
Isoproturon or Avadex B.W.

Question 28.
How many irrigations are required for Barley?
Answer:
1-2 irrigations.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 29.
Name major pulse crops of RabL
Answer:
Grams and lentils.

Question 30.
Name major oil seed crops of RabL
Answer:
Gobi sarson, Toria, Taramira, Linseed (alsi) and Sunflower.

Question 31.
Which country is the highest producer of pulses?
Answer:
India.

Question 32.
Which state has the highest production of pulses in India?
Answer:
Rajasthan.

Question 33.
How much area is occupied by gram crop?
Answer:
Two thousand hectare.

Question 34.
What is average yield of gram in Punjab?
Answer:
Five quintal per acre.

Question 35.
Name crop rotations for gram crop.
Answer:
Bajra-grams, Paddy/Maize-gram.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 36.
Name varieties of grams (irrigated).
Answer:
GPF – 2, PBG – 1.

Question 37.
Name varieties of desigrams (non irrigated).
Answer:
PDG – 4 and PDG – 3.

Question 38.
Name varieties of kabuli grams.
Answer:
552, BG 1053.

Question 39.
Give seed rate for desi grams.
Answer:
15 to 18 kg per acre.

Question 40.
Give seed rate for kabuli grams.
Answer:
37 kg per acre.

Question 41.
What is the optimum time of sowing for desi gram (rain fed)?
Answer:
10 to 25 October.

Question 42.
What is suitable time for sowing kabuli grams?
Answer:
25 October to IQ November.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 43.
What is line spacing for gram?
Answer:
30 cm.

Question 44.
How many irrigations are required for grams?
Answer:
One irrigation.

Question 45.
How much area is under the cultivation of lentils?
Answer:
1100 hectare.

Question 46.
What is the average yield of lentils?
Answer:
2-3 quintals per acre.

Question 47.
Give crop rotation for lentils.
Answer:
Rice-lentils, Cotton-lentil, groundnut-lentil.

Question 48.
What is seed rate for lentil?
Answer:
12 to 15 kg per acre.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 49.
What is sow spacing for lentil?
Answer:
22.5 cm.

Question 50.
How many irrigations are required for lentil?
Answer:
1 to 2 irrigations.

Question 51.
Which insect attack the lentil crop?
Answer:
Pod borer.

Question 52.
Raya is placed in which category commercially?
Answer:
Mustard category.

Question 53.
Name crop rotations for Raya.
Answer:
Maize/Bajra – Raya – Summer Moong, Cotton – Raya.

Question 54.
Name improved varieties of Raya.
Answer:
RLC – 1, PBR – 210, PBR – 91.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 55.
What is seed rate for Raya?
Answer:
1.5 kg per acre.

Question 56.
What is row spacing for Raya?
Answer:
30 cm.

Question 57.
If superphosphate is not available, which other fertilizer can be used for Raya?
Answer:
Gypsum.

Question 58.
In which category gobhisarson is placed at commercial level?
Answer:
Rape seed category.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 59.
Write crop rotations for gobhisarson.
Answer:
Rice/maize-gobhi sarson – summer moong, cotton – gobhi sarson.

Question 60.
Name varieties of gobhisarson.
Answer:
PGSH 51, GSL 2, GSL-1

Question 61.
Which are canola varieties?
Answer:
GSC 6, GSC 5.

Question 62.
What is seed rate for gobhisarson?
Answer:
1.5 kg per acre.

Question 63.
What is the row spacing for gobhisarson?
Answer:
45 cm.

Question 64.
Where is the production of sunflower highesf in the world?
Answer:
Ukrain.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 65.
How much land area is occupied by sunflower in Punjab?
Answer:
20-21 thousand hectare.

Question 66.
What is the average seed yield for sunflower?
Answer:
6.5 quintal per acre.

Question 67.
Which soil is not suitable for cultivation of sunflower?
Answer:
Salt affected soils.

Question 68.
Give sunflower crop rotation.
Answer:
Rice/maize – Potato – sunflower, Rice – Toria – sunflower, Cotton – sunflower, Basmati – sunflower.

Question 69.
Name varieties of sunflower.
Answer:
PSH 996, PSH 569, Jawalamukhi.

Question 70.
Give row spacing for sunflower.
Answer:
60 cm.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 71.
Where should the seed of sunflower be placed below the ridge top?
Answer:
6 to 8 cm below the ridge top.

Question 72.
What is used to control weeds in sunflower?
Answer:
Stomp.

Question 73.
How many irrigations are required for sunflower?
Answer:
6 to 9 irrigations.

Question 74.
How much fodder is required for an adult animal?
Answer:
40 kg per day.

Question 75.
Write the name of four fodder crops of Rabi.
Answer:
Berseem, safflower, shaftal, lucerne, oats, ryegrass, senji.

Question 76.
Write the name of two improved varieties of Berseem.
Answer:
BL 42, BL 10, BL1.

Question 77.
What is seed rate for Berseem?
Answer:
8 – 10 kg per acre.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 78.
What is optimum time for sowing of Berseem?
Answer:
Last week of September to first week of October.

Question 79.
What should be used for controlling of Bueen?
Answer:
Basalin.

Question 80.
If there is problem of itsit what should be mixed with Berseem?
Answer:
Raya.

Question 81.
When is Berseem ready for first cutting?
Answer:
About 50 days after sowing.

Question 82.
Name varieties of oats.
Answer:
OL 9, Kent.

Question 83. What is seed rate for oats?
Answer:
25 kg per acre.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 84.
What is time of sowing for oats?
Answer:
Second week of October to last week of October.

Question 85.
How many irrigations are required for oats?
Answer:
3-4 irrigations including Rauni (pre-sowing irrigation)

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Why is cool climate required at the time of sowing for wheat?
Answer:
Warm climate is unfavourable to tillering and it becomes helpful in promoting several diseases.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 2.
What type of soil is required for wheat?
Answer:
Wheat can be grown on all types of soils except water logged and highly deteriorated alkaline soils. Well drained medium textured loamy soil is the best. For durum wheat medium to fine textured soils are best suited.

Question 3.
How will you control the problem of gullidanda in wheat?
Answer:
If problem of gullidanda is found, it can be reduced by rotation of wheat with Berseem, Potato, Raya etc. Stomp, Leader, Topik, Total herbicides can be used to control gullidanda.

Question 4.
When should we not use leader or stomp in the Helds of wheat?
Answer:
If wheat is grown mixed with gobhi sarson or Raya, then we should not use leader or stomp.

Question 5.
What are the symptoms for deficiency of zinc in wheat?
Answer:
Generally, deficiency of zinc appears in light soils. Due to deficiency of zinc, plants do not develop properly. Crop becomes stunted and bushy. Leaves become chloiatic, which break and keep hanging.

Question 6.
What are the symptoms of deficiency of manganese in wheat?
Answer:
Generally, deficiency of Manganese appears in light soils. The symptoms appear on middle leaves and specks are seen at lower part as intervenial chlorosis. These specks then coalesce and form bands but the veins remain green.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 7.
What do you know about soil type for Barley?
Answer:
Barley can grow well in sandy and salt affected soils. In the initial phases of reclamation of these soils, Barley can be-grown.

Question 8.
What do you know about seed rate and seed treatment for Barley?
Answer:
For timely and irrigated crop seed rate is 35 kg seed per acre, is required. For delayed and rain fed crop seed rate is 45 kg per acre. Treat the seed with Vitavax or Raxil to control smut.

Question 9.
Write about fertilizer application in Barley.
Answer:
Requirement of fertilizers for barley is 25 kg nitrogen, 12 kg phosphorus and 6 kg Potash per acre. Apply Potash after getting tested the soil Drill all the fertilizers at the time of sowing.

Question 10.
Write about weed control in Barley.
Answer:
Broad leaf weeds like Bathu can be controlled by applying 2, 4-D or algrip, Jaundhar (wild oats) by isoproturan or avadex BW and gullidanda by Puma Power or topic.

Question 11.
Write about major insect-pest and major diseases of Barley.
Answer:
Insect which can attack barley is aphid. Diseases of barley are – stripe disease, covered smut, yellow rust etc.

Question 12.
Why is there a need of importing Pulses?
Answer:
India is a leading country in the production of pulses but consumption of pulses in India is also very high therefore there is a need of importing pulses.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 13.
Write climate requirement for grams.
Answer:
Severe cold and frost are injurious to this crop but due to early onset of summer, crop matures before time and yield is reduced. This is a crop of low-rainfall areas.

Question 14.
What type of soil is suitable for grams?
Answer:
Well drained, light to medium textured soil is best suited for grams. This crop can grow, even in those soils, in which other crops can not grow. Saline, alkaline or water logged soils are not suitable for grams.

Question 15.
What do you know about field preparation for grams?
Answer:
There is no requirement of field preparation for grams. If soil is ploughed deeply (deep tillage!, it helps in increasing the yield and it also help in preventing some of the diseases.

Question 16.
What do you know about irrigation for grams?
Answer:
Generally, one irrigation is required for grams. This irrigation should be applied between mid December to last January but never irrigate before sowing.

Question 17.
What do you know about harvesting of gram?
Answer:
When pods mature and plants dry up, crop is ready for harvesting.

Question 18.
What type of climate and soil is suitable for lentil?
Answer:
Cool climate is best suited for lentil. It can tolerate frost and severe cold. It can be grown in all types of soils except alkaline, water logged and salt affected soils.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 19.
What do you know about land preparation for Lentil?
Answer:
Plough the field two-three times followed by planking each time.

Question 20.
What do you know about fertilizer application in lentil?
Answer:
Lentil require 5 kg nitrogen per acre. When the seeds are inoculated with Rhizobium then 8 kg phosphorus and if not inoculated than 16 kg phosphorus per acre is required. Apply the fertilizers at the time of sowing.

Question 21.
What do you know about irrigation of lentil?
Answer:
Depending on rain, 1 to 2 irrigations are required for lentil. If one irrigation is to be applied, apply it after six weeks of sowing. But if two irrigations are to be applied then first water is given after 4 weeks and second at flowering stage or pod formation is given.

Question 22.
What do you know about harvesting of lentil?
Answer:
Crop is ready for harvesting when plants dry up and pods mature.

Question 23.
Write about climate and soil type for Raya.
Answer:
Raya is best suited for medium to high rain fall areas. It can grow in nearly all types of soils.

Question 24.
What do you know about method of sowing for Raya?
Answer:
Row spacing for Raya is 30 cm and thinning of the crop is done after three weeks of sowing by keeping the spacing 10 to 15 cm.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 25.
Write about field preparation for Raya.
Answer:
Field is prepared by ploughing 2 to 4 times followed by planking everytime. Raya can be sown by using zero till drill without ploughing.

Question 26.
Write about harvesting and threshing for Raya.
Answer:
Crop is ready for harvesting when pods mature and become yellow. Harvested crop should be stacked. Threshing is done after a week of cutting the crop.

Question 27.
Write about climate and soil requirement for gobhisarson.
Answer:
Gobhisarson is best suited for medium to heavy rainfall areas. All types of soils are suitable for growing the crop.

Question 28.
Write about seed rate and preparation of land for gobhi sarson.
Answer:
Seed rate for gobhisarson is 1.5 kg per acre. Field is prepared by ploughing 2-4 times followed by planking each time.

Question 29.
Write about oil extracted from sunflower seeds.
Answer:
Oil obtained from sunflower seeds is low in cholestrol. Edible refined oil is prepared from this. This oil is also used for manufacturing of soaps.

Question 30.
What type of soil is required for growing sunflower?
Answer:
Well drained medium textured soil is best suited for sunflower. Salt affected soil is not suitable. .

Question 31.
Write about land preparation, seed rate and seed treatment for sunflower.
Answer:
Seed rate for sunflower is 2 kg per acre and it is treated with A . recommended fungicides. For land preparation 2-3 ploughings followed by planking are required.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 32.
Write about hoeing and weed control in sunflower.
Answer:
First hoeing should be done after 2-3 weeks of the emergence of weeds. After that hoeing should be done after 3 weeks. Use stomp to control weeds.

Question 33.
Write about harvesting and threshing of sunflower.
Answer:
When heads turn yellowish brown at lower surface and disc starts drying up, crop is ready for harvesting. Harvested sunflower should be threshed immediately after harvesting.

Question 34.
How many cuttings can be taken for berseem?
Answer:
From November to mid of June many cuttings of berseem which are tasty and nutritious can be taken.

Question 35.
How do the seeds of Kashni (Chicory) separated from seeds of Berseem?
Answer:
Seeds of Berseem are put in water. Kashni seeds are light in weight and float on water. These can be separated by sieve.

Question 36.
Write about application of fertilizer in Berseem.
Answer:
At the time of sowing 6 tonne of farm yard manure (FYM) and 20 kg phosphorus per acre is required. If FYM is not available then 10 kg nitrogen and 30 kg phosphorus per acre should be applied.

Question 37.
Write about irrigation in Berseem.
Answer:
First irrigation is applied after 6-8 days after sowing. Next irrigations are applied, in summer after 8-10 days and in winter after 10-15 days.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 38.
What do you know about harvesting of Berseem?
Answer:
First cutting is ready after 50 days of sowing and subseqent cuttings are ready after 40 days interval in winter and then after every 30 days in spring.

Question 39.
Which type of soil is required for oats?
Answer:
Oats can be grown in all types of soils except waterlogged and alkaline soils.

Question 40.
What is the time and method of sowing for oats?
Answer:
Time of sowing for oats is from second week of October to last week of October. Row spacing is 20 cm. It can be sown by using zero till drill without ploughing.

Question 41.
What dq you know about hoeing and irrigation for oats?
Answer:
Generally, there is no need of hoeing. But if there is problem of weeds then hoeing should be done. 3-4 irrigations including Rauni are required.

Question 42.
Write about fertilizer application for oats.
Answer:
8 kg phosphorus, 15 kg nitrogen per acre to be applied at the time of sowing. 15 kg of nitrogen per acre is required after 30-40 days of sowing.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write about following for cultivation of wheat:
(i) Improved varieties
(ii) Land preparation after paddy
(iii) Irrigation
(iv) Pest insects and diseases.
Answer:
(i) Improved varieties: PBW 621, DBW 17, PBW 343, PDW 291 etc.

(ii) Land preparation after harvesting paddy:
If wheat is to be grown after paddy, there is enough soil moisture otherwise apply rauni. Plough the field using disc hasrow in wattar (idealistic moisture in soil) state. If paddy is harvested using combine, then left over straw can be ploughed and mixed with soil, for this plough twice followed by planking. After this, use cultivator once and if soil is heavy plough it twice and apply planking each time. Use happy seeder machine to sow wheat in combine harvested paddy field without burning the left over of paddy.

(iii) Irrigation:
If wheat is sown in October then apply first irrigation after three weeks of sowing and then irrigate after four weeks. At this time, special roots are formed in wheat which are known as crown roots. 4-5 irrigations are needed for wheat.

(iv) Pest-insects and diseases:
Army worm, aphid, termite, gram pod borer etc. attack the crop. Diseases which can harm the crop are yellow rust, brown rust, loose smut, ear cockle (mamni) and yellow ear rot (tundu), and kamal bunt etc.

Question 2.
Describe following cultivation practices for Barley.

  1. Improved varieties
  2. Climate
  3. Time of sowing
  4. Row spacing
  5. Irrigation.

Answer:

  1. Improved varieties: VJM 201, PL 426, PL 807.
  2. Climate: Barley require cool climate during initial stage (i.e. during early growth) and at maturity it required warm and dry weather: Barley can be grown in low rainfall areas.
  3. Time of sowing: 15 October to 15 November.
  4. Row spacing: For timely sowing 22.5 cm and for late-sown and rainfed condition 18 to 20 cm.
  5. Irrigation: 1-2 irrigations are required.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 3.
Describe the following for cultivation of grams:

  • climate
  • soil type
  • rotation
  • improved varieties
  • seed rate
  • weed control
  • harvesting
  • insects pests and diseases.

Answer:
Answer yourself.

Question 4.
Describe cultivation of lentil with respect to following points

  • climate and soil
  • improved varieties
  • crop rotation
  • seed rate and treatment
  • fertilizers
  • harvesting.
  • irrigation

Answer:
Answer yourself.

Question 5.
Give cultivation details for Raya.
Answer:
Answer yourself.

Question 6.
Give fertilizer application for wheat, barley, grams and lentil.
Answer:
Fertilizer application per acre is as follows:

Nitrogen Phosphorus Potash
1. Wheat 50 kg 25 kg 12 kg (after testing of soil)
2. Barley 25 kg 12 kg 6 kg (after testing of soil)
3. Grams

(i) Desi grams

(ii) Kabuli grams

 

6 kg

6 kg

 

8 kg

16 kg

 

4. Lentil 5 kg 8 kg (if seed inoculation is done) otherwise 16 kg.

PSEB 10th Class Agriculture Solutions Chapter 3 Rabi Crops

Question 7.
What do you know about irrigation of sunflower?
Answer:
First irrigation should be done after one month of sowing of sunflower. After that, irrigation should be done at intervals of 2-3 weeks. During summer in the months of April-May irrigations should be done at intervals of 8-10 days. At the flowering stage and at soft and hard dough stages of crop, irrigation application is must. Total 6-9 irrigations are required for sunflower.

Question 8.
How is field prepared for sowing of wheat?
Answer:
See above question.

Question 9.
Write a note pn sowing time and method of sunflower.
Answer:
See above question.

Question 10.
Write the description of cultivation of Kabuli Gram as per given below:

  1. Soil
  2. Two improved varieties
  3. Seed rate per acre
  4. Sowing time
  5. Irrigation
  6. Harvesting.

Answer:

  1. Soil: Well-drained, light to medium textured soil is best suited for grams. This crop can grow, even in those soils, in which other crops can not grow. Saline, alkaline, or waterlogged soils are not suitable for grams.
  2. Two improved varieties: L 552, BG 1053.
  3. Seed rate per acre: 37 kg.
  4. Sowing time: 25 October to 10 November.
  5. Irrigation: Only one.
  6. Harvesting: When pods mature and plants dry up, the crop is ready for harvesting.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Computer Book Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 10 Computer Science Chapter 3 HTML II

Computer Guide for Class 10 PSEB HTML II Textbook Questions and Answers

1. Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
What is the use of Forms in HTML?
(a) To display contents of email
(b) To display animation effect
(c) To collect user’s input
(d) None of the Above
Answer:
(c) To collect user’s input

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

Question 2.
Which of the following is most commonly used HTTP methods?
(a) PRE and POST
(b) GET and SET
(c) ASK and REPLY
(d) GET and POST
Answer:
(d) GET and POST

Question 3.
Is it possible to link within the current page?
(a) Yes
(b) No
(c) Only in frames
(d) Null
Answer:

Question 4.
An html form is part of a web page that includes areas where:
(a) Information is feeded by the user
(b) And sent to the website server
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 5.
A container tag and is used to allow multiple lines of text in a single input item is known as:
(a) Text area
(b) Checkbox
(c) Radio Button
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Text area

PSEB 10th Class Computer Book Chapter 3 HTML II

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

2. Fill in the Blanks

Question 1.
……………. tag is used to create a linkon a webpage.
Answer:
Anchor

Question 2.
………….is used to feed informationinto the Webserver.
Answer:
Form

Question 3.
If you want to allow multiple lines oftext ………………. is used in the form.
Answer:
Textarea

Question 4.
To select multiple options in a form we can use …………….
Answer:
Checkbox

Question 5.
To clear all options from a form we can use ……………… button.
Answer:
Reset

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

3. True or False

Question 1.
An unvisited Link is underlined and blue.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
<input type=”password”> will show asterisks in the text box.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
Selection lists are used to define the dropdown lists.
Answer:
True

4. Full Forms

1. <A>
Answer:
Anchor tag

2. HREF
Answer:
Hyperlink REFerence

3. URL
Answer:
Uniform Resource Locator

4. BGCOLOR
Answer:
Background Color

5. SRC
Answer:
Source

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

5. Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Which tag is used to link a webpage?
Answer:
<A> Anchor Tag.

Question 2.
Which attribute is defined to specify where to send the form-data when a form is submitted?
Answer:
Action attribute.

Question 3.
This method is used to encode the feeded data by the user by using URL path and is sent to the server.
Answer:
GET method.

Question 4.
What are used to perform some action on the given webpage?
Answer:
Button.

6. Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is hyperlink?
Answer:
Hyper link is a method to connect two destinations on web pages. These destinations can be with in a webpage or it can be outside web page i.e. on another webpage.

Question 2.
What is Anchor tag? Explain with example.
Answer:
Anchor tag is the tag which is used to create a link in html document. This tag creates link within a webpage and also with another webpage. The tag uses href as compulsory attribute.
Example : Following is an example of anchor tag <a href= “www.Google.com” > Google </a>

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

Question 3.
What is a form?
Answer:
An html form is part of a web page that includes areas where readers can enter information to be sent back to website or the publishers of the web page It is a container that consists of other form elements such as text box, radio buttons ,list box etc.

Question 4.
Name diffefent types of buttons used in html form.
Answer:
Following are the types of buttons in HTML.
1. Submit Button
2. Reset Botton

Question 5.
What is checkbox?
Answer:
Check box appears as a small square the user can select or deselect by clicking on it. It is generally used where a group is used for sharing a common name from where information can be selected It is used in <input> html element. We must give each check box a name attributes the value defined in the type at¬tribute is checkbox. These Eire explained below with an example.
<input type-‘checkbox” name=”Child”>Children Toys <input type-‘checkbox” name=”Fumiture”> stool
You can check any option or both by clicking on it. It also supports some additional attributes.

7. Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Discuss different types of buttons with example. .
Answer:
Buttons are used to perform some action on the given webpage. Some important buttons are discussed below :
Submit button:
Every form must include a button that submits the form data to the server. You can put any label you like on this button. It has two attributes these are type, which has submit value and value attribute defines the name of the • submit button which can be displayed on the button. These are explained below with an example:
Ex.:<input type=”submit” value=”OK”>
A button will appear on screen. When the user clicks it, all data items on the form are submitted

Reset Button:
You can also include a button that clears all entries on the form so users can start over if they change their minds or make mistakes. It has two attributes these are “type”, which has reset value and value attribute defines the name of the reset button, which can be displayed on the button. These are explained below with an example:
Ex.:<input type= “reset”value= “Reset”>

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

Question 2.
What is selection list in form?
Answer:
Selection list is an option in which user can select single or multiple options from a given list. In this option multiple inputs are available but some options can be displayed at a time. Scrolling Lists and Pull-Down pick lists are created with the<select>tag. You can use this tag together with the<option>tag: <select>
<option> wjndows</option><option> Linux </option><option> Mac</option>
</select>
No html tags other than <option> and </option> should appear between the <select> and </select> tags.
Attributes of select tag:
Select tag has following attributes-
1. Size Attribute:
Size determines how many items are shown at once on the selection list. If size=”3″ were used in the preceding code, only the first three options would be visible, and a scrollbar would appear next to the list so the user could scroll down to see the third option.
Ex.: <Select name – ‘Weekday” size=4>

2. Name:
It is used to define name to the drop down menu.
<Select name =”WeekDay” size=4 multiple>

3. Multiple:
This is used to select multiple options from the given list. This is the value which has to be given back to the website and defined in the option tag.
Ex.: <optionValue=”Sunday”>Sunday
When this option is used the given option will be preselected.

Question 3.
Explain Text Area with an example.
Answer:
This is a container tag and is used to allow multiple lines of text in a single input item. It has two attributes these are ROWS and COLS. Row defines the number of rows defined in the text area and cols defines the number of columns used in the text area. If user wants to define some default text then he can define in-between the open closing tags of text area element. All this is explained in the given example. <textarea name=”comments” rows=”5″ cols=”25″>
Please type in more information.
</textarea>

Question 4.
What is the purpose of action and method in forms?
Answer:
Get Method:
This method is used to encode the fed data by the user by using URL path and is sent to the server. Limited data can be sent to the server. Its parameters remain in the browser history.
<FORM method=get action-‘ action.php”>

Post Method:
This method is used to store the data to the server without interfering JRL and is more secure to send information than GET method from the website form to the server. There is no restriction on sending data. Its parameters don’t remain in the browser history.
<form method=post action=”action.php”>

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

PSEB 10th Class Computer Guide Office Tools Important Questions and Answers

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
What is used to link two pages?
(a) Page
(b) Glue
(c) Button
(d) Hyperlink
Answer:
(d) Hyperlink

Question 2.
What is not used in Form:
(a) Button
(b) Text Box
(c) Radio Button
(d) Row
Answer:
(d) Row

Question 3.
How many types of links are?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(a) 2

Question 4.
How many types of Methods are in a form?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

Fill in the Blanks

Question 1.
The text which is highlighted in Blue is called ……………..
Answer:
Hyperlink

Question 2.
…………….. attribute is used to change color in table.
Answer:
BGCOLOR

Question 3.
………… attribute is used to change sell spacing.
Answer:
Cell spacing

Question 4.
………….. is used to change cell width. (2019)
Answer:
Colspan

Question 5.
Brower shows a hyper link in ……….color.
Answer:
Blue

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

Question 6.
…………… is used to go to another place in a webpage.
Answer:
Bookmark.

Select True/False

Question 1.
Anchor tag is used to create Hyperlink.
Answer:
False

Question 2.
<img> tag is used to insert images.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
HREF is an attribute of <img> tag.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
We can insert image in background.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
SCR is an attribute of <img> tag.
Answer:
True

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is the use of anchor tag?
Answer:
Anchor tag is used to create hyperlink

Question 2.
What is linking?
Answer:
Linking is the process of joining two webpages.

Question 3.
What is SCR attribute?
Answer:
SCR attribute is used to tell the source of image in<img> tag.

Question 4.
What are various alignment option for an image?
Answer:

  • Left
  • Right
  • Top
  • Bottom
  • Middle.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is the purpose of submit button?
Answer:
Every form must include a button that submits the form data to the server. We can put any label on this button. It has two attributes these are type, which has submit value and value attribute defines the name of the submit button which can be displayed on the button.

Question 2.
What is Marquee?
Answer:
Marquee tag is used to move the text in html document. The text starts moving when is viewed in web browsers.

Question 3.
What is inline style?
Answer:
The style in which style is defined in the tag is called inline style. It is stored in same html document and is used when the style is not repeated anywhere in the document. It effects only to that style on which it is applied.

Long Answer Type Question

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 3 HTML II

Question 1.
How external Movie or image can be used in HTML document?
Answer:
Adding Audio/Video files in HTML:
User can link audio/video files in HTML document using anchor (<a>) tag. User has to give the path of audio/video file in href attribute of anchor tag. Whenever the user clicks on the link, the files will automatically gets downloaded and is played in the associated software.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Computer Book Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 10 Computer Science Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Computer Guide for Class 10 PSEB HTML Fundamentals Textbook Questions and Answers

1. Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
What should be the first tag in any HTML document?
(a) <head>
(b) <title>
(c) <html>
(d) <document>
Answer:
(c) <html>

Question 2.
What is the correct HTML tag for inserting a line break?
(a) <br>
(b) <lb>
(c) <break>
(d) <newline>
Answer:
(a) <br>

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 3.
A webpage displays a picture. What tag was used to display that picture?
(a) picture
(b) image
(c) img
(d) src
Answer:
(c) img

Question 4.
Page designed in HTML is called is:
(a) Yellow Page
(b) Web Page
(c) Server Page
(d) Front Page
Answer:
(b) Web Page

Question 5.
HTML document is saved using extension:
(a) .htl
(b) .html
(c) .hml
(d) .htnl
Answer:
(b) .html

PSEB 10th Class Computer Book Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 6.
Table tag has various other tags, these are:
(a) <TR>
(b) <TD>
(c) <TH>
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

2. Fill in the Blanks

Question 1.
HTML stands for …………..
Answer:
Hyper-Text markup Language

Question 2.
…………… list to represent an unorganized list.
Answer:
Unordered List

Question 3.
…………….. tag is used to define the elements of a list.
Answer:
<LI>

Question 4.
ALT stands for …………….
Answer:
Alternate

Question 5.
………… is the main part of the HTML document in which whole information about the webpage resides.
Answer:
<body>

Question 6.
The ………………… contains title that identifies the heading of the html document.
Answer:
Heading

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

3. True or False

Question 1.
HTML is a structured Language.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Table heading starts with <TH> tag and ends with</TH>tags
Answer:
True

Question 3.
Align does not defines the alignment of the attached image in contrast to the other contents of the webpage
Answer:
False

Question 4.
CELLPADDING is the pixel space between-the cell contents and the cell border.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
Definition list generally contains the definitions of different terms and their meaning.
Answer:
True

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

4. Full Forms

Question 1.
HTML
Answer:
Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 2.
<B>
Answer:
Bold

Question 3.
<I>
Answer:
Italic

Question 4.
<U>
Answer:
Underline

Question 5.
<OL>
Answer:
Ordered List

Question 6.
<UL>
Answer:
Unordered list

Question 7.
<P>
Answer:
Paragraph

Question 8.
<BR>
Answer:
Break

Question 9.
SRC
Answer:
Source

Question 10.
<IMG>
Answer:
Image

Question 11.
<TR>
Answer:
Table row

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 12.
<TH>
Answer:
Table Heading

Question 13.
<TD>
Answer:
Table Data

Question 14.
LI
Answer:
List Item

Question 15.
URL
Answer:
Uniform Resource Locator.

5. Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Name the tag which is by the beginning and ending tags.
Answer:
Container Tag

Question 2.
Name the tag of the HTML document in which whole information about the webpage resides.
Answer:
Body tag

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 3.
Name a tag which is an empty element that is used to break a line and display the proceeding text from the next line, without giving any space between two lines.
Answer:
<br>

Question 4.
Name the list which have information related to each other but their sequence is not important.
Answer:
Bulleted Lists

6. Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is HTML ?
Answer:
HTML stands for Hyper Text markup Language. It is a language used for designing a web page in which text, graphics, and other information are organized, formatted, and linked together. HTML is extremely simple, Flexible, easy to learn, interactive, widely accepted Markup Language.

Question 2.
What is a Tag ?
Answer:
Tag is a HTML command which is understood by web browser. These are also called as elements. These are enclosed in angle brackets. HTML document can not be prepared without these tags.

Question 3.
What is <Img> tag. Explain.
Answer:
<img> tag is used to embed an image in HTML document. It means it displays an image in HTML web page. The general syntax of thi stag is <image SRC=””FILENAME”>

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 4.
Name different tags used to create a table.
Answer:
Following tabgsa re used to create a table in HTML.
(i) <table> </table>
(ii) <th> </th>
(iii) <tr> <tr>
(iv) <td> </td>

Question 5.
Explain Font tag with its attributes.
Answer:
Font tag is used to change the style and shape of the text which is used in any HTML document. It allows to format data on a given web page. Font tag has four main properties:

  • Style: Font style can be changed in three ways – Bold, Italic and Underline.
  • Font Face: Face defines the type face to be used like writing.
  • Font Colour: Font colour gives different colours to the text.
  • Font Size: Font size changes size of text matter.

7. Differentiate Between

(i) Ordered and Unordered List.
The difference between ordered and unordered lists is as follows:

Ordered List Unordered list
1. In an Ordered list, the order of the list item is important. If we charge the order, the meaning of the whole list changes. 1. In an unordered list the order of the items is not significant .We can swap two items or reverse the whole list and it still remains the same list
2. Ordered List starts with <OL> and ends with</OL> tag. 2. Unordered List starts with <UL> and aids with</UL> tag.
3. Ordered List has an <U> (list Item) tag which defines the list dements defined in the list 3. Unordered List has an <U> (List Item) tag which defines the list dements defined in the list
4. In an Ordered List, the attribute used is TYPE Which has values as 1, A, a, I, i. 4. In an Ordered List the attribute used is TYPE Which has values as, o, and SQUARE.
5. Default value of TYPE ATTRIBUTE is 1. 5. Default “value of TYPF. ATTRIBUTE is “Disc”.

(ii) Background and BGCOLOR.
The difference between background and BGCOLOR is as follows:

Background BGCOLOR
1. Background attribute is used in body as well as in table tag ,to add background image in the given webpage or a table. 1. BGCOLOR attribute is used in body as well as in table tag, to change the background color of the webpage or a table.
2. Syntax <body background=”Red”> 2. Syntax is <table bgcolor=nGreen”>
3. Example
<BODY background-“image.jpg”>
3. Example
<body bgcolor=”green”>

(iii) Colspan and Rowspan.
The difference between colspan and rowspan is as follows

1. Sometimes it makes sense for a cell to span multiple columns . This might be used for a header cell that titles a group of columns of entries. 1. Sometimes it makes sense for a cell to span multiple rows. This might be used for a side-bar that groups rows of entries.
2. Allows a single table cell to span the width of more than one cell or column. 2. Allows a single table cell to span the height of more them one row.
3. COLSPAN is attribute that is used in i.e. <th> and <td> tag. 3. ROWSPAN is attribute that is used in i.e. <th> and <td> tag.
4. It provides the same functionality as “merge cell” in spreadsheet programs like Excel. 4. It provide the same functionality as “merge cell” in spreadsheet programs like Excel.
5. Example:
<th colspan=”3″>
5.Example:
<th rowspann=”3″>

(vi) Tag and Attribute.
Difference between tag and attribute is as follows

Tag Attribute
1. Tags contain elements which provide instructions for how information will be processed or displayed. There are both starter tags <TAG> and end tags </ TAG> Tags are used to mark up the start and end of an HTML element. 1. An attribute defines a property for an element, consists of an attribute. Its value appears within the element’s start tag.
2. Tags contains elements as well as attribute 2. Attribute is a part of starting Tag of an element.
3. These are of two types:-Empty Tag and Container Tag 3. Types of Attribute depend upon the tag used .i.e. each tag has its own number of attributes.
4. Example:-

<Table > Here table is a tag.

4. Example:-

<Table Border=”2″ >

Here a table is the Tag and border is its attribute.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

8. Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Describe the basic structure of HTML in Details.
Answer:
HTML document has two main parts :
1. Head: The head section contains title that identifies the heading of the HTML document.
2. Body: The body element contains the actual contents or information that you want to display on a web page to the end user.
HTML document contains the following syntax:
<html> <head>
<title>Title Of Webpage </title>
</head>
<body>
Body of HTML Document
</body>
</html>
The tags defined in the above structure basically define or instruct the web browser about the different operation to be performed on the text defined in the given TAGS.

<html> </html>:
HTML document is started <html>and ended </html>with this tag. This TAG informs the web browser from where a web page will start and where it ends. If the commands are not defined in tags then the commands are taken as text by the web browser.

<head> </head>:
Head tag provides Header information. The document title is written in Head Tag. It always occurs in pair. Head Tag is considered very important for a web page. This is a container tag. It defines the Heading of the html document. It starts with<head> tag and ends with </head>. This Tag is always defined below <html> and above <body>tag. It contains information regarding title of the webpage, keywords used by the search engines etc. It contains no text in itself.

<Title> </Title>:
TITLE tag defines the title of the webpage, which is to be displayed on the title bar of the web browser when the web page is loaded in the web browser. It is enclosed in between <Title> and</Title>tags. It should be short and meaningful of <Title> First Web Page </Title>

<body> </body>:
This tag contains the actual information to be displayed on the web browser. When the webpage is loaded in the web browser. It may contain any element or contents related to text, images, audio, video etc. These contents are defined with in <body> and </body> tags.

For Example:
<body>This is document in HTML document. </BODY>
Each Body tag has different characteristics. These characteristics (properties) are termed as attributes. We can select Background colour, text colour, font size etc. with these attributes.

Question 2.
What are the various tags used in table ? Explain with an example.
Answer:
HTML table is created using <table> </Table Tag. HTML tables are composed row by row. You indicate a new row with the <TR> (table row) tag, and you separate the data with either the <TH> (table header) or <TD> (table data) tags. Think of the <TR> tag as a line break, signaling that the following data starts a new table row. Table headers are generally shown in bold and centered by WWW browsers, and table data is shown in the standard body text format.
The basic HTML table tags
1. <TABLE></TABLE>: These HTML tags are the containers for the rest of the table data.

2. <TR></TR>:
Each row in the table is contained by these tags. You can optionally leave off the closing </TR> tag.

3. <TD></TD>:
Defines a cell. Table data is contained within these tags: You can also nest additional tables within a single cell. You can optionally leave off the closing </TD> tag.

4. <TH></TH>:
These table header tags are used to define headers, usually in the first row or column of the table. You can optionally leave off the closing </TH> tag. In addition to the basic tags shown here, some other characteristics of table tag.

5. BORDER attribute:
By using the BORDER attribute of the <TABLE> tag, borders are put around the table. You set the value of this attribute to the number of pixels wide you want the border, like this: BQRDER=1. If you set this attribute to 0, the browser will not display a border.

6. ALIGN attribute:
The ALIGN attribute can be specified in the <TABLE> tag with possible values of LEFT, RIGHT, and CENTER (the default is LEFT). HTML 4.0 specifies a new value for ALIGN of CHAR, which implements alignment on a specified character, such as a decimal point.

7. Table heads:
In most browsers, table heads enclosed by the <TH> </TH> tags are emphasized and centered.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 3.
Explain ordered list with an example ?
Answer:
Ordered list is created using <ol> </ol> Tag. The attribute type may be ‘a’, ‘A’, 1,1, ‘i’, etc. On the face of it, ordered lists look a lot like unordered lists, and a lot of the same rules apply to both constructs. The only difference in HTML is that instead of using <UL> and </UL>, an ordered list is contained within the tags <OL> and </OL>. Ordered lists are based on list items, just as unordered lists are.
However, when an ordered list is displayed in a Web browser, it uses an automatically generated sequence of item markers. In other words, the items are numbered. The markup for a simple ordered list, based on the first example in this chapter: <OL>
<LI>Monday
<LI>Tuesday
<LI> Wednesday
<LI>Thursday
<LI>Friday
</OL>
The above markup will look similar to the previously discussed simple unordered list, with the important difference that each day of the week is numbered instead of preceded by a “bullet.” In other words, it looks like this :
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Ordered lists are as nestable as unordered lists, and you can nest unordered lists in ordered lists, as well as the other way.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 4.
Explain Nested List with example.
Answer:
A list within a list is called nested list. It can be any type of list. i.e. an ordered list can contain unordered list or a definition list or vice-versa. A list can contain any number of lists in it.
This can be seen in following example
PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals 1

PSEB 10th Class Computer Guide Office Tools Important Questions and Answers

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Which is related with Internet ?
(a) HTML
(b) XML
(c) CSS
(d) All of Above
Answer:
(d) All of Above

Question 2.
HTML document cannot work without which tag ?
(a) <p>
(b) <hr>
(c) <html>
(d) <table>
Answer:
(c) <html>

Question 3.
What is essential to view a website ?
(a) Internet
(b) Web Brower
(c) None of these
(d) Both of these
Answer:
(d) Both of these

Question 4.
How many types of methods are in a form ?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 3

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Fill in the Blanks

1. ……………. types of tags are used in HTML.
Answer:
Two

2. Opening and closing tags are used in …………………
Answer:
Container

3. There is no closing tag in ……………………… tag.
Answer:
Empty

4. The text editor named ………….. is set for creating HTML document.
Answer:
Text.

5. HTML document is opened in ………………
Answer:
Browser.

6. …………… extension is used to save HTML document.
Answer:
HTML or HTM.

7. In HTML document first and last tag should be ………… and ………..
Answer:
<HTML>, </HTML> .

8. Unordered list’is also called ……………. list.
Answer:
<UL>

9. …………. list represents numbers.
Answer:
Ordered Nested.

10. When a list U created in another list, it is named …………….. list.
Answer:
Ordered Nested.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

 True or Flase

1. The HTML tags can be written in Capital or small Letters of English Alphabets.
Answer:
True

2. Text is written in word pad to create a home page.
Answer:
True

3. Body tag is written after Head tag.
Answer:
True

4. Container tag is a solo tag.
Answer:
False

5. Title is written in Head Tag.
Answer:
True

6. There are six levels in Heading.
Answer:
True

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

7. The tag <P> is used for paragraph.
Answer:
True

8. The attributes of a list: Face, Size, Colour.
Answer:
False

9. The tag <BR> is used to make the text dynamic
Answer:
False

10. The bullets are marked in an Ordered List.
Answer:
False.

Match the Following

A B
1. HTML Document Body Tag
2. Container Tag Number
3. <OL> Bullet
4. <UL> Face, Size and Color
5. Font attribute Word Pad

Answer:

A B
1. HTML Document Word Pad
2. Container Tag Body Tag
3. <OL> Number
4. <UL> Bullet
5. Font attribute Face, Size and Color

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Full Forms

Question 1.
HTML
Answer:
Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 2.
<B>
Answer:
Bold

Question 3.
<I>
Answer:
Italic

Question 4.
<U>
Answer:
Underline

Question 5.
<P>
Answer:
Paragraph

Question 6.
<BR>
Answer:
Break

Question 7.
<OL>
Answer:
Ordered List

Question 8.
<UL>
Answer:
Unordered list

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write the attributes of Unordered Lists?
Answer:

  • Bullet
  • Disc
  • Square

Question 2.
What is a table row?
Answer:
<TR><VTR>-Each row in the table is contained by these tags. You can optionally leave off the closing </TR> tag.

Question 3.
Which tags are used to show table heading and table data?
Answer:
<th> tag is used to give table heading and <td> tag is used to show the data.

Question 4.
Write the procedure of changing the table size.
Answer:
We can change the size of the table by using the width and height attributes of table tag.
<table width = “300” height = “400”>

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 5.
How will you make the border of a table?
Answer:
By giving the border attributes of table tag.

Question 6.
What is meant by cell spacing?
Answer:
The space between two cells is called cell spacing.

Question 7.
Write a short note on colspan.
Answer:
To span two adjacent cells in a column, use the COLSPAN attribute with <TH> or <TD>, as follows:
<TD COLSPAN=2>

Question 8.
What is the use of Anchor tag?
Answer:
Anchor tag is used to create link between two documents.
<a href= “c:\jsb\jap.htmT>

Question 9.
What do you mean by Linking?
Answer:
Linking is used to connect the two documents. It is also called hyperlink.

Question 10.
What is SRC attribute?
Answer:
SRC indicates the source of the file.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 11.
What are the methods of aligning an image?
Answer:

  • Left
  • Right
  • Center
  • Top
  • Bottom
  • Middle.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write names of any four tags used in HTML.
Answer:

Tags Description
<HTML> …</HTML> Encloses the entire HTML document.
<HE AD>… < / HE AD> Encloses the head of the HTML document.
<TITLE>… </TITLE> Indicates the title of the document. Used within <HEAD>.
<BODY>…</BODY> Encloses the body of the HTML document.
<P>…</P> A paragraph. The closing tag (</P>) is optional.
<BR> A line break.
Tags Description
<HR> A horizontal rule line.
<H1>…</H1> A first-level heading.
<H2>…</H2> A second-level heading.
<H3>…</H3> A third-level heading.
<H4>…</H4> A fourth-level heading (seldom used).
<H5>…</H5> A fifth-level heading (seldom used).
<H6>…</H6> A sixth-level heading (seldom used).

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 2.
Write types of tags used is HTML.
Answer:
There are two kinds of HTML tags:
1. Paired (Container) Tag:
A tag is said to be a paired tag if the text is placed between a tag and its companion tag. In paired tags, the first tag is referred to as Opening Tag and the second tag is referred to as Closing Tag.

2. Unpaired ( Empty) Tag:
Unpaired tags work alone, and are usually placed before the text you,want formatted. An impaired tag does not have a companion tag. Unpaired tags are also known as Singular or Stand-Alone Tags. An unpaired tag sometimes also called empty.

Question 3.
What are container tags?
Answer:
Paired (Container) Tag:
A tag is said to-be a paired tag if the text is placed between a tag and its companion tag. In paired tags, the first tag is referred to as Opening Tag and the second tag is referred to as Closing Tag.

Question 4.
What is a Nested List?
Answer:
Nested List. The list entities mentioned above can be combined to produce nested lists. For example, the following contains two numbered lists within one unordered list:
1. Departments in the B-Block:

  • Chemistry
  • Engineering
  • Geology

2. Departments in the C-Block:

  • Economics
  • Politics
  • Sociology

This document describes glossary lists. The following document ([Next] from the menu at the top of the page) explains the formatting of regular lists.

Question 5.
What is HTML?
Answer:
The Hypertext Mark-up Language (or HTML) is the language used to create documents for the World Wide Web. As the name implies it is a mark-up language – the original (ASCII) text is edited and new (text) codes i.e. tags are added to indicate how (and where) the text should appear.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 6.
How will you create home page of a Website? Write the steps.
Answer:
The first page of the website is called home page.
The followings are the steps to design home page:
1. Start___ Program_____ Accessories ______Notepad.
2. Write HTML coding and save with .html extension.
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<IT1LE> Titlf Text Goes Here </TlTLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
Hello Students
</BODY>
</HTML>

Question 7.
Explain definition lists with an example.
Answer:
As you might expect, definition lists begin and end with the tags <DL> and </DL>. However, unlike the unordered and ordered lists, definition lists are not based on list items. They are instead based on term-definition pairs.

Question 8.
Write names of various attributes of font.
Answer:
The various attributes of Font tag are:

  • Face
  • Size
  • Color.

Question 9.
For what purpose Marquee tag is used?
Answer:
The marquee tag is used to navigate the text on web page.
<Marquee> Hello </Marquee>

Question 10.
Mention the names of different types of lists used in HTML.
Answer:
There are three types of Lists in HTML:

  • Ordered List
  • Unordered List
  • Definition List

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is the features of HTML?
Answer:
HTML:
Originally, HTML was developed with the intent of defining the structure of documents like headings, paragraphs, lists, and so forth to facilitate the sharing of scientific information between researchers. Web page has many elements as page style, paragraph, list, table and picture etc. Each section is written in the form of tag. The tags indicate that the element viz. heading, list, paragraph etc to which the section of web page relates. Picture, sound and movie can be included in addition to the text in a web page.

Question 2.
Discuss the structure of HTML Document.
Answer:
Structure Of Document:
It is easier to understand the structure of a HTML document. The complete document is written between <HTML> and </HTML> tags. The tags <Head>, <Body>, <Title>etc are written between these. The structure of HTML document is explained in detail below:
PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals 2
Question 3.
What are the different Headings Tags in HTML?
Answer:
HTML Headings:
The heading tag is used to fix the heading. There are 6 levels of heading in all. The levels are numbered as heading 1 to heading 6. All the letters of the heading in a given level have same font. The font size go^S on decreasing as we move from heading 1 to heading 6. The heading in level 1 is expressed by tags <H1> and </Hl>. Similarly in the heading in level 2 we use the tags <H2> and </H2>. <H6> is the lowest level. The font size in it is the smallest.

Tags Description
<HR> A horizontal rule line.
<H1>…</H1> A first-level heading.
<H2>…</H2> A second-level heading.
<H3>…</H3> A third-level heading.
<H4>…</H4> A fourth-level heading (seldom used).
<H5>…</H5> A fifth-level heading (seldom used).
<H6>…</H6> A sixth-level heading (seldom used).

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 4.
Explain type attribute in an Ordered list.
Answer:
HTML Ordered Lists:
If you are required to put your items in a numbered list instead of bulleted, then HTML ordered list will be used. This list is created by using <ol> tag. The numbering starts at one and is incremented by one for each successive ordered list element tagged with <li>.
PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals 3
The type Attribute
You can use type attribute for <ol> tag to specify the type of numbering you like. By default, it is a number. Following are the possible options :
<ol type = “1”> – Default-Case Numerals.
<ol type = “I”> – Upper-Case Numerals.
<ol type = “i”> – Lower-Case Numerals.
<ol type = “A”> – Upper-Case Letters.
<ol type = “a”> – Lower-Case Letters.
The start Attribute
You can use start attribute for <ol> tag to specify the starting point of numbering you need. Following are the possible options:
<ol type = “1” start = “4”> – Numerals starts with 4.
<ol type = “I” start = “4”> – Numerals starts with IV.
ol type = “a” start = “4”> – Letters starts with d
<ol type = “A” start = “4”> – Letters starts with D.

Question 5.
What are the tags used to creating tables in HTML? Explain.
Answer:
The HTML tables allow web authors to arrange data like text, images, links, other tables, etc. into rows and columns of cells.
The HTML tables- are created using the <table> tag in which the <tr> tag is used to create table rows and <td> tag is used to create data cells. The elements under <td> are regular and left aligned by default.
Example
PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals 4
Table Heading:
Table heading can be defined using <th> tag. This tag will be put to replace <td> tag, which is used to represent actual data cell. Normally you will put your fop row as table heading as shown below, otherwise you can use <th> element in any row. Headings, which are defined in <th> tag are centered and bold by default.

Cellpadding and Cellspacing Attributes:
There are two attributes called cellpadding and cellspacing which you will use to adjust the white space in your table cells. The cellspacing attribute defines space between table cells, while cellpadding represents the distance between cell borders and the content within a cell.

Colspan and Rowspan Attributes:
You will use colspan attribute if you want to merge two or more columns into a single column. Similar way you will use rowspan if you want to merge two or more rows.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals

Question 6.
Can you use insert image in your website? If yes, how? Explain with examples.
Answer:
Html Images:
Images are very important to beautify as well as to depict many complex concepts in simple way on your web page. This tutorial will take you through simple steps to use images in your web pages.

Insert Image:
You can insert any image in your web page by using <img> tag. Following is the simple syntax to use this tag.
<imgsrc = “Image URL” … attributes-list/>
The <img> tag is an empty tag, which means that, it can contain only list of attributes and it has no closing tag.
Example
To try following example, let’s keep our HTML file test.htm and image file test.png in the same directory.
PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals 5
Set Image Location:
Usually we keep all the images in a separate directory. So let’s keep HTML file test.htm in our home directory and create a subdirectory images inside the home directory where we will keep our image test.png.

Set Image Width/Height
You can set image width and height based on your requirement using width and height attributes. You can specify width and height of the image in terms of either pixels or percentage of its actual size.

Set Image Border :
By default, image will have a border around it, you can specify border thickness in terms of pixels using border attribute. A thickness of 0 means, no border around the picture.
Example
PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals 6
Set Image Alignment:
By default, image will align at the left side of the page, but you can use align attribute to set it in the center or right.
Example
PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 HTML Fundamentals 7

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Social Science Book Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 10 Social Science Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

SST Guide for Class 10 PSEB Infrastructure of the Indian Economy Textbook Questions and Answers

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is meant by infrastructure?
Answer:
Infrastructure of the economy signifies that part of the capital stock of the economy is necessary from the viewpoint of providing various types of services.

Question 2.
What are the main components of economic infrastructure in India?
Answer:
The main components of economic infrastructure in India are :

  1. Transport and communication
  2. Electric power
  3. Irrigation
  4. Banking and financial institutions.

Question 3.
Name the various modes of transport in India.
Answer:
The following are the important means of transport in India :

  • Rail transport
  • Road transport
  • Water transport
  • Air transport.

Question 4.
What do you main by irrigation?
Answer:
Irrigation means providing the necessary water to the cultivable land through man-made or artificial means. Due to uneven, irregular and uncertain rainfall, irrigation assumes added importance.

Question 5.
What are the major sources of irrigation in India?
Answer:
Tubewells, river, tank etc. are the major sources of irrigation in India.

Question 6.
Write a short note on Reserves Bank of India.
Answer:
The reserve Bank of India (RBI) is the Central Bank of India, which was established on April 1, 1935 monetary institution which supervise, regulates controls and develops the monetary and financial system of the country. The Reserve Bank of India is fully owned and operated by the Government of India.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 7.
Write a note on the Commercial Bank of India.
Answer:
A Commercial Bank is a financial institution which performs the functions of accepting deposits from the general public and giving loans for investment with the aim of earning profit. Commercial Banks plays a singificant role in fulfilling the short term and medium term finacial requirements of Industries. Commercial Back can be described as a financial institution, that offers basic investment products like a savings account, current account, etc to the individuals and corporates.

Question 8.
What are the specific banking institutions of India?
Answer:
The specific banking institutions of India are :

  • Industrial Development Bank of India
  • Industrial Finance Corporation of India
  • Land Development Banks
  • Co-operative Banks
  • Regional Rural Banks
  • National Bank For Agriculture and Rural Development (NABARD)
  • Export-Import Bank (Exim Bank),

Question 9.
What do you mean by consumer protection? What are its main methods?
Answer:
Consumers’ protection means to prevent the exploitation of the consumers from the unfair trade practices of the producers of consumer goods.

Consumer protection methods are:

  • MRTP Act was passed in 1969.
  • Consumer Protection Act 1986 was passed.
  • Consumers’ Disputes Redressal forums have been established.

Question 10.
Write a short note on Public Distribution System.
Answer:
Through Public Distribution System, Government distributes the necessities of life; like foodgrains, sugar, kerosene, coarse cloth etc. at concessional prices through Fair Price Shops at fixed quantities to the general public especially to the poor sections of the society.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What do you mean by infrastructure? Why- is it required?
Answer:
Infrastructure is that part of the capital stock of the economy which is necessary from the viewpoint of providing various kinds of services. In other words infrastructure means those activities, facilities and services which are helpful in the operation and development of other sectors for example, Roads, Rails and Buses offering transport services. Canals and dams facilitating irrigation, etc.

It is required for the development of the country. Infrastructure like electricity, transport and communication are important for the development of every country.

Lack of infrastructure facilities will create hurdles in the development of industries and agriculture sectors. As a result of it their rate of growth will come down. Therefore, in every underdeveloped country there is a need of availability of infrastructure in a sufficient quantity which will be helpful in acceleration of their development.

Infrastructure is required to increase production and decrease cost.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 2.
What are the main kinds of infrastructure in India? Explain.
Answer:
That part of the capital stock of the economy which provides direct services to the system of production and distribution is called the economic infrastructure of the economy.

The main constituents of economic infrastructure in India are as follows :

  • Transport and Communication
  • Electric Power
  • Irrigation
  • Banking and other Financial Institutions.

Economic infrastructure like transport, communication, power, irrigation, banking etc. have played a very important role in the economic development of our country.

Question 3.
What are main monetary institutions of India?
Answer:
The main monetary institutions in India are:

  • Moneylenders
  • Reserve Bank of India
  • Commercial Banks
  • Specialised Banking Institutions :
    (a) Industrial Development Bank of India
    (b) Regional Rural Banks
    (c) Export-Import Bank of India (Exim Bank)
    (d) Land Development Banks
    (e) Co-operative Banks
    (f) National Bank for Agriculture and Rural Development (NABARD)
    (g) Industrial Finance Corporation of India etc.
  • Non-Banking Financial Institutions:
    (a) Unit Trust of India
    (b) Life Insurance Corporation of India
  • Stock Exchanges.

Question 4.
What do you mean by consumer exploitation? What are the main methods of consumer protection?
Answer:
Consumers exploitation means the exploitation of the consumers from unfair trade practices of the producers of consumer goods. Trading classes are putting their all out efforts to exploit the consumers as they are the most confused and unorganised persons in modern Indian Economy. Adulteration, substandard packed goods, use of non-standard weights or misleading and fabricated advertisements are such activities which exploit the consumers to a large extent.

Methods of Consumers’ Protection. In order to protect consumers’ interest, the govt, has enacted the following legislations:

  • Essential Commodities Act, 1955.
  • The Standards of Weights and Measures Act, 1976.
  • The Prevention of Food Adulteration Act, 1976. ‘
  • The Monopolies and Restrictive Trade Practices Act, 1969.
  • The Prevention of Black Marketing and Maintenance of Supplies of Essential Commodities Act, 1980.
  • Consumers’ Protection Act, 1986.

In order to redress the grievances of the consumers at very low expenses and for their early disposal ‘Consumer Disputes Redressal Forums’ have been established at the district, state and national levels. Along with this, consumer protection councils have also been established to protect the interest of the consumers. They can lodge a complaint. Besides this consumer education and consumer organisations also play a vital role to protect the interests of the consumers.

Question 5.
What do you mean by Public Distribution System? Explain the present position of Public Distribution System in India.
Answer:
Public distribution system signifies a system through which the govt, of a country makes provision to supply essential items like foodgrains, sugar, kerosene, etc. to its people, especially the poor people, in fixed quantity at controlled prices through fair price shops.

There are three main constituents of public distribution system in India :
1. Public Procurement System. In 1988, over 14 million tonnes of foodgrains were procured by the govt, at procurement prices. In 2006, this figure rose to 26.4 million tonnes.

2. Buffer Stock. Black-marketing in the foodgrains can be checked if the govt, has buffer stock of foodgrains and adequate storage facilities. In India, we have many warehouses in the public sector. Important among them are the warehouses of Food Corporation of India. The Corporation has got its warehouses throughout India. It stores agricultural goods and releases stock under public distribution system.

3. Fair-Price Shops. The system of public distribution in India operates fairly successfully through a network of fair-price shops selling foodgrains, sugar, kerosene and soft coke. At present, we are having around 4.37 lakh fair price shops. In 1988, 23 million tonnes of foodgrains and in 2006,26.8 million tonnes of foodgrains were distributed through these fair-price shops.

PSEB 10th Class Social Science Guide Infrastructure of the Indian Economy Important Questions and Answers

Answer the following questions in one word or one line :

Question 1.
Define Consumer.
Answer:
When we buy and use any commodity we become consumer.

Question 2.
State any one component of economic infrastructure.
Answer:
Irrigation.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 3.
Name any one mode of Transport in India.
Answer:
Railway.

Question 4.
Which are the two main modes of Irrigation in India?
Answer:
Rain and Rivers.

Question 5.
When was R.B.I. established?
Answer:
1935.

Question 6.
When was Consumer Protection Act established?
Answer:
1986.

Question 7.
State any one function of R.B.I.
Answer:
It issues notes.

Question 8.
State the name of the apex bank of India.
Answer:
R.B.I.

Question 9.
State any one specific banking institution in India.
Answer:
NABARD.

Question 10.
State the full form of P.D.S.
Answer:
Public Distribution System.

Question 11.
Name one infrastrucuture of the economy.
Answer:
Transport.

Question 12.
What is stock exchange?
Answer:
Where securities are bought and sold.

Question 13.
Name the non-banking financial institution in India.
Answer:
L.I.C.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 14.
Name any one multipurpose project in India.
Answer:
The Bhakra-Nangal project.

Question 15.
Name one public sector shipping company in India.
Answer:
Mugal lines.

Question 16.
Name the important mean of communication.
Answer:
Telephone.

Question 17.
Name the source of electric power.
Answer:
Thermal Power.

Question 18.
What is a commercial bank?
Answer:
It generally gives short term loans.

Question 19.
What is the objective of multipurpose river valley projects?
Answer:
Production of hydro electricity.

Question 20.
State any one feature of Consumers’ Protection Act, 1986.
Answer:
To seek redressal against unfair trade practices.

Question 21.
State any One cause for the need of PDS.
Answer:
Inadequate shortage and marketing facilities.

Question 22.
What is Irrigation?
Answer:
It means providing the necessary water to the cultivable land.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 23.
Name some infrastructures of the economy.
Answer:
Transport and communication, power, irrigation, banking and financial institutiolis, Education, Health and family welfare, housing and other civic amenities.

Question 24.
What is meant by economic infrastructure?
Answer:
That part of the capital stock of the economy which is necessary for providing-the different types of direct services to the system of production and distribution is called the economic infrastructure of the economy.

Question 25.
What is meant by transport system of a given country?
Answer:
All those means which help in the transportation of goods and people from one place to another constitute the transport system of a country.

Question 26.
Name the important means of communication.
Answer:
Postal services, telegram, telephone, radio, television, newspapers, etc.

Question 27.
Name two public sector shipping companies in India.
Answer:

  1. Shipping Corporation of India and
  2. Mugal Line.

Question 28.
Name any two multipurpose projects in India.
Answer:

  1. The Bhakra-Nangal Project and
  2. The Damodar Valley Project.

Question 29.
Name any one specialised banking institution in India.
Answer:
Industrial Development Bank of India.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 30.
Name the important non-banking financial institutions in India.
Answer:

  1. Unit Trust of India and
  2. Life Insurance Corporation of India.

Question 31.
What is meant by Stock Exchange?
Answer:
A market in which securities are bought and sold is known as stock exchange or share market.

Question 32.
Write any one main function of R.B.I.
Answer:
To issue notes.

Question 33.
What is meant by Consumer Education?
Answer:
By consumer education we mean the education to be imparted to the consumers which may enable them to safeguard their interest and help them to become rational consumers.

Question 34.
Name the important means of transport.
Answer:
Railways, Road, Water and Air transport are the main means of transport.

Question 35.
Name the sources of electric power.
Answer:
Thermal power-, Hydel power and Nuclear power are the sources of power in India.

Question 36.
What are the sources of irrigation?
Answer:
Rainfall, Wells, Tubewells, Ponds are the main sources of irrigation.

Question 37.
What is the name of Central Bank of India?
Answer:
Reserve Bank of India.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 38.
When was R.B.I established?
Answer:
1935.

Question 39.
What are Commercial Banks?
Answer:
Commercial Banks are those banks which generally give short term loan.

Question 40.
Name two Non-Banking institutions.
Answer:
L.I.C., U.T.I.

Question 41.
When was Consumer Protection Act launched?
Answer:
1986.

Question 42.
What do you mean by Public Distribution System?
Answer:
Supply of essential commodities to the people through government agencies is known as Public Distribution System.

Question 43.
Which is one mode of Electric power in India?
Answer:
Thermal Power.

Question 44.
What are the major sources of Power in India?
Answer:
The major sources of Power in India are:

  1. Thermal Power
  2. Nuclear Power
  3. Hydel Power.

Question 45.
How many commercial banks are nationalised?
Answer:
In 1969, fourteen banks were nationalised, 6 more banks were nationalized inl980 which accounted for 20. But now its number is 19.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 46.
Write the name of India’s Central Bank.
Answer:
Reserve Bank of India.

II. Fill in the blanks :

Question 1.
RBI was established in ___________ (1945 / 1935)
Answer:
1935

Question 2.
When we use any commodity we become__________(Producer / Consumer)
Answer:
Consumer

Question 3.
Consumer Protection Act was estabhshed in_________year. (1985 / 1986)
Answer:
1986

Question 4.
_______ is the Apex Bank of India. (SBI / RBI)
Answer:
RBI

Question 5.
________ gives short terms loans. (Central bank / Commercial bank)
Answer:
Commercial bank

Question 6.
NABARD was estabhshed in_______year. (1982 / 1999)
Answer:
1982

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 7.
Irrigation is a component of __________ infrastructure. (Social / Economic)
Answer:
economic

Question 8.
_______ issues notes in a country. (RBI / SBI)
Answer:
RBI.

III. Multiple Choice Questions :

Question 1.
State any one function of RBI.
(a) Note issue
(b) Bank of the Govt.
(c) Banker’s Bank
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

Question 2.
When was RBI established?
(a) 1925
(b) 1935
(c) 1945
(d), 1955.
Answer:
(b) 1935

Question 3.
When was Consumer Protection Act established?
(a) 1980
(b) 1982
(c) 1986
(d) 1988.
Answer:
(c) 1986

Question 4.
When was NABARD established?
(a) 1982
(b) 1986
(c) 1988
(d) 1989.
Answer:
(a) 1982

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 5.
Which is the Central Bank of India?
(a) SBI
(b) PNB
(c) RBI
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(c) RBI

Question 6.
What are the main components of economic infrastructure in India?
(a) Banking
(b) Electric power
(c) Irrigation
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

Question 7.
What are the specific Banking Institutions in India?
(a) Regional Rural Bank
(b) NABARD
(c) Exim Bank
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 8.
PDS stands for :
(a) Public Demand Supply
(b) Public Distribution System
(c) Private Demand and supply
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(b) Public Distribution System

True / False :

Question 1.
RBI was estabhshed in 1935.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
SBI is the apex bank of India.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
There are three sources of electricity in India.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
NABARD was estabhshed in 1992.
Answer:
False

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 5.
COPRA was implemented in 1986.
Answer:
True

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is the need for infrastructure?
Answer:
The prosperity of a country depends directly upon the development of agriculture and industry. Agricultural production, however requires power, credit transport facilities etc. Industrial production requires not only machinery and equipment but also skilled man-power, management, energy .banking facilities, marketing faclities, transport services, communication facilities etc.All these facilities and services constitute collectively the infrastructure of the economy and the development and expansion of these facilities are an essential pre-condition for increasing agricultural and industrial production in a country.

Question 2.
What is the importance of means of transport in a given economy?
Answer:
Transportation is the most important constituent of economic infrastructure. It helps trade,commerce and industry. Transportation connects one place with the other. It reduces regional imbalances. It carries passengers and goods. It adds directly to our economic structure i.e. the process of production and distribution. It has been rightly said that “If agriculture and industry are regarded as the body and bones of the economy, transport constitutes its nerves.”

Question 3.
Write a short note on Railways as a means of transport in India.
Answer:
In India railway services were started on April 16,1853 when the first train was run between Bombay (Muihbai) and Thane. Now Indian railways are first in Asia and fourth in the world. Indian railways have a route length of nearly 62,759 kilometres. Indian railways rim 13,000 trains everyday connecting 7056 railway stations.

Question 4.
Write a short note on air transport in India.
Answer:
Air transport is the fastest and costliest means of transportation. There are two public sector companies for air transportation in India-Indian Air Lines Corporation and Air India International. Some private sector companies have also been established sincel992. There are four international aerodromes in India at Delhi, Mumbai, Chennai and Kolkata. In recent years, important policy decisions have been taken to speed up the development of civil aviation in the country.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 5.
Write a short note on Communication system in India.
Answer:
The Communication system comprises posts and telegraphs, telecommunication system, broadcasting, television and information services. Since 1950-51, the postal network has been expanded throughout the country, and in recent years, with special emphasis on the rural, hilly and tribal areas. As far as the telecommunications are concerned, India has a network comprising over 18,000 exchanges with a capacity of 84 lakh lines and 72 lakh working telephones. The network has been expanding at an annual rate of 15 to 17 per cent. The outlay for the telecommunication in the Ninth Plan was over? 30,000 crore.

Question 6.
Highlight the main sources of power in India.
Answer:
There are three main sources of power in India:

  • Thermal power stations-using coal or oil.
  • Hydro-electric power stations-using potential power of fast-flowing rivers or high dams.
  • Nuclear power or atomic power-India is one of the few countries which have developed their nuclear capacities. At present, we are having five atomic power stations.

In our economy, we traditionally had thermal power which still accounts for the largest part of our electricity generation. With the emergence of the great multi-purpose river- valley projects, we have also developed hydroelectric power on a big scale. Finally, we also went in for nuclear power.

The priority for power distribution in our economy is shifting to the rural areas.

Question 7.
What are the objectives of multi-purpose river-valley projects?
Answer:
Multi-purpose projects are so named as they aim at serving several purposes at one and the same time. The important objectives of these multi-purpose river-valley projects are :

  • Production of hydroelectricity.
  • To help in storing water, which can be used for irrigation at the time of need.
  • To prevent erosion of soil and conserve land.
  • To promote fish rearing and navigation.
  • To help in checking floods.
  • To promote tourism in the country, etc.

Question 8.
Highlight the various features of the Consumers’ Protection Act, 1986.
Answer:
Consumers’ Protection Act, 1986 is the latest act which safeguards the interests of the consumers in the following ways :

  1. Protects against the marketing of commodities hazardous to life and property.
  2. Informs about the quality, purity, potency, weight and price of the commodity.
  3. Ensures the availability of goods at a competitive price.
  4. Seeks redressal against unfair trade practices.
  5. Provides setting up of:
    (a) Consumers’ forum at district level.
    (b) State forum and commission at state level.
    (c) National Consumers’ Grievances Redressal Cell at national level.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 9.
Write a short note on need for public distribution system in India.
Answer:
The forces of demand and supply do not always achieve the socially desirable objectives, so it becomes necessary that the Govt, should interfere in the production and distribution of commodities.

The necessity of public distribution system in India is because of the following reasons:

  • Limited resources and means of production.
  • Inadequate production.
  • Inadequate storage and marketing facilities.
  • Corrupt practices of producers and traders i.e. hoarding and black-marketing.
  • Inequality of income and poverty leading to starvation.

Question 10.
Briefly describe the economic infrastructure of transport in India.
Answer:
Transport. After the railways, the principal mode of transport in our economy is the roadways. In fact, over the last two decades, the heavy trucks on our highways linking the main industrial centres have become quite a match for the railways in many spheres. Passenger bus services also compete successfully with the railways in many regions. All this has come about mainly because of the improved network of well-made roads that make up a new and important part of our economic infrastructure today.

Besides railways and roads, our economy is served by coastal shipping, inland waterways and, of course, domestic airlines as the other modes of inland transportation. International shipping is handled by the major ports of the country like Mumbai, Kolkata, Haldia, Chennai, Mangalore, Marmugao and Vishakhapatnam and many minor ports. The Air India and other international airlines operate through the airports maintained by the International Airports Authority of India.

Question 11.
Describe the economic infrastructure of Power in India.
Answer:
The rate at which electric power is consumed by an economy is often an index of its state of industrialisation. The power produced and consumed per head of population in our country is very low indeed, but it is rising fast. This is an indication that modern industries are growing in the economy and the country is developing.

In our economy, we traditionally had thermal power which still accounts for the largest part of our electricity generation. With the emergence of the great multi-purpose river- valley projects we also developed hydro-electric power on a big scale. Finally, we also went in for nuclear power.

The priority for power distribution in our economy is shifting to the rural areas.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 12.
Describe the economic infrastructure of Irrigation in India.
Answer:
Irrigation provides an important input in the production of most crops, particularly in areas where rains are scarce or highly irregular. For centuries our economy has depended on fairly extensive systems of man-made irrigation besides natural irrigation for agriculture. We have dug wells, tanks and canals not only for the supply of our drinking water but also for watering our cultivated land from time immemorial. But whether natural or man-made, irrigation in most parts of our country has always been partially rain-fed. Rains, however, in India are mostly seasonal and dependent on the monsoons and the monsoons, till this day, are one of the world’s most difficult to understand weather phenomena. Thus, inspite of the introduction of modem technology and management techniques, Indian agriculture still is a gamble, though the magnitude of the uncertainty has diminished.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Explain the role of transport in economic development.
Answer:
Role of Transport in Economic Development:
Transport, as said, is called as the lifeline of the country. It has a vast impact on the economic development of the country. The importance of transport with reference to economy is as follows :

  1. Means of transport enable the maximum use of the resources because the movement of the sources is possible to the various parts of the country.
  2. With the help of transport we can grow new markets and specialization as resources can be moved from different areas of the world.
  3. Labour and capital become mobile. As a result the regional imbalances are removed.
  4. Due to transport means the agricultural sector has been transferred.
  5. Due to means of transport industries have been developed as they require cheap, best and faster means of transport for their growth.
  6. Due to easy means of transport there has been a manifold increase in the encouragement to the tourism department.
  7. Due to means of transport the gaps between the places have been narrowed and it has improved the social relationships.
  8. Means of transport are of strategic importance as they provide internal security as well as external security.
  9. Means of transport help in checking the fluctuation in prices thereby maintaining the economic stability.
    Hence, we can conclude that thinking of economic activities in the absence of means of transport will be such as flowers without fragrance.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 2 Infrastructure of the Indian Economy

Question 2.
Explain the main functions of central bank.
Answer:
The main functions of central bank are as follows :

  1. Bank of note issue. In the modern time, issuing of notes is the main function of central bank of every country in the world. Central bank has the monopoly in this regard. In India, RBI issues notes as a central bank of the country except one rupee note which is issued by the ministry of finance, government of India.
  2. Banker, Agent and Advisor to the Government. The central bank acts as a banker, agent and advisor to the government.
  3. Bankers’ Bank. Central bank acts as a banker of all other banks in the country. Central bank keeps relation with the banks in the same way as commercial banks keep relation with their customers.
  4. Lender to the Last Resort. In a time of crisis, the central bank acts as a lender to the last resort. It provides loans to commercial banks when they are in deep trouble.
  5. Custodian of the Foreign Exchange Reserves. The central bank acts as a custodian of the foreign exchange reserves of the country.
  6. Custodian of Cash Reserves of the commercial banks. The central bank also keeps the cash reserves of the commercial banks.
  7. Bank of central clearance, settlement, and transfer. A central bank is an institution where all the transactions of commercial banks are cleared, settled, and transferred very easily.
  8. Control of credit. The central bank has got so many instruments to control credit like bank rate, open market operation, change in cash reserve ratio, credit rationing, moral persuasion, and direct actions, etc.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Computer Book Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 10 Computer Science Chapter 1 Office Tools

Computer Guide for Class 10 PSEB Office Tools Textbook Questions and Answers

1. Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Which tool is used to maintain a budget, financial statements, and sales records?
(a) Multimedia
(b) Spreadsheet
(c) Presentation
(d) Database
Answer:
(b) Spreadsheet

Question 2.
Word automatically inserts a page break when we reach the ………… of a page.
(a) Starting
(b) End
(c) Mid of page
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) End

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Question 3.
As we type our document, …………. wavy lines will appear under any word that is spelled incorrectly.
(a) Blue
(b) White
(c) Red
(d) Black
Answer:
(c) Red

Question 4.
The most common types of effects include entrances and exits.
(a) Animation
(b) Sound Effect
(c) Design
(d) Transition
Answer:
(a) Animation

Question 5
…………. is the blank space around the edges of the page.
(a) Graphics
(b) Design
(c) Margin
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Margin

2. Fill in the Blanks

1. Computer software is classified into two categories ………. and ………….
Answer:
System software and Application software

2. Database software is a collection of related data. The purpose of this tool is to ………… and ………. data.
Answer:
Organize and Manage

3. We can choose either ……….. (vertical) or ………….. (horizontal) orientation for all or part of our document.
Answer:
Portrait or Landscape

4. The image file extensions supported by PowerPoint include ………… TIFF (.tiff) and Bitmap (.bmp)
Answer:
JPEG (.jpg),GIF

5. Multimedia software is tool that allows the user to create ……….. and …………. with the help of media players and real players.
Answer:
Audio and Videos.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

3. True or False

Question 1.
The main purpose of Spread sheet tool is to produce documents.
Answer:
False

Question 2.
Application software is software that can perform a specific task for the user
Answer:
True

Question 3.
We can drag existing tab stops left or right along the ruler to a different position.
Answer:
True.

Question 4.
Print Preview automatically displays when we click on the Print tab.
Answer:
True

4. Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write extension of Word document in Ms Office 2010.
Answer:
.docx

Question 2.
Write extension of Spread Sheet in Ms Office 2010.
Answer:
.xlsx

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Question 3.
Write extension of Power Point Presentation Ms Office 2010.
Answer:
.pptx

Question 4.
Write the full form of bmp (Image file).
Answer:
BitMaP

Question 5.
Write the full form of PDF.
Answer:
Portable Document Format

PSEB 10th Class Computer Book Chapter 1 Office Tools

5. Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Define System Software?
Answer:
System software are the set of software which are used for the working of computer system and its hardware. It includes operating system, language translators etc.

Question 2.
Explain database software?
Answer:
Database is a collection of related data. The purpose of database tools is to organize and manage data. The advantage of these tools is that we can change the way data is stored and displayed. SQL Server, MS access, data Base, FoxPro, Paradox, and Oracle are some of the examples of database software tools.

Question 3.
Explain multimedia software.
Answer:
Media players and real players are the examples of multimedia tools. These tools allow the user to create audio and video files. The different forms of multimedia tools are audio converters, audio and video players, video encoders and decoders.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Question 4.
What is Page Break? How to insert a page break?
Answer:
Page break is a way to tell MS word that the page has ended. These can be automatic and manual.
Inserting a Page Break:
1. Click where we want to start a new page.
2. On the Insert tab, in toe pages group, click Page Break.
We can also insert breaks into our document by going to the Insert tab, Pages group and clicking on the Page Breaks command to view a variety of page.

6. Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is office tool ? Explain any five types of office tools?
Answer:
Office tools are software programs designed to make computer users more productive and efficient at our workplace. Office productivity tool is a category of application programs that help users produce things such as documents, databases, graphs, worksheets and presentations.

Types of office tools are-
1. Word Processing Tools:
The main purpose of word processing tools is to produce good looking documents. MS-Word, WordPad, Notepad and Adobe Pagemaker are some of the examples of word processing tools.

2. Database Software Tools:
Database is a collection of related data. The purpose of database tools is to organize and manage data. The advantage of these tools is that we can change the way data is stored and displayed. SQL Server, MS access, dataBase, FoxPro, Paradox, and Oracle are some of the examples of database software tools.

3. Spreadsheet Tools:
The spreadsheet tools are used to make calculations, maintain budget, financial statements, and sales records. The purpose of these tools is to work with numbers. It allows the users to perform simple as well as complex calculations on the numbers. MS-Excel, Open Office are examples of spreadsheet tools.

4. Presentation Tool:
Presentation tools are used to display the information in the form of slide shows. The main functions of presentation tools is editing that allows insertion and formatting of text, including graphics in the text and executing the slide shows. The examples for these tools are Microsoft PowerPoint, Open Office Present.

5. Multimedia Software:
Media players and real players are the examples of multimedia tools. These tools allow the user to create audio and video files. The different forms of multimedia tools are audio converters, audio and video players, video encoders and decoders.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Question 2.
Write steps to create Student Annual Report using mail merge with spreadsheet?
Answer:
Student Annual Report can be created using MS Word and MS Excel using following steps:
1. Prepare the annual report format in MS word. Mention student’s detail like admission no, roll no, name, father’s name, marks of each subject, overall result and percentage of marks of student.

2. On the other side, prepare a excel worksheet, in which student’s admission no, roll no, name, father’s name, subject-wise marks obtained in subjects Punjabi, English, Maths, Science, Social Studies and grades etc. are-entered.

3. Next calculate the percentage of marks of each student using a formula.

4. Now, click on Mailing Tab, and start mail merge. Then, choose Letter option which we already prepared.

5. Next Click on Select Recipients and select Use Existing List option. Choose excel sheet from Select Table dialog box and click OK.

6. Place the cursor where you want to insert the value of field from excel sheet. Now go to Insert Merge Field option in Write & Insert Fields group. A dropdown menu will be displayed having field names.

7. Select the field names one by one after placing the cursor in proper place in the student annual report. All fields will be displayed.

8. After inserting all the clicking Preview Results next and previous button, you can preview the result of students by option.

9. Now click on Finish & Merge option and select Edit Individual Documents from the menu. A dialog box Merge to New Document will open. Choose option All and click OK to show the report card of all the students in excel worksheet.

10. Now a new Word document will open having report card of all the students. Save this document and we can also take printouts.

Question 3.
What are Tab Stops? Explain setting manual tab stops.
Answer:
Tabs are the facility which help to display the content in more structured and tabular form without using tables.
Setting up the Tab Stops:
1. Click the tab selector at the left end of the ruler it displays the type of tab that you want.
2. Click in the ruler at the top of our page, where we want to set the tab stop.
The different types of tab stops are:

  • Left Tab stop sets the start position of text that will then run to the right as we type.
  • Center Tab stop sets the position of the middle of the text. The text centers on this position as we type.
  • Right Tab stop Sets the right end of the text. As we type, the text moves to the left.
  • Decimal Tab stop aligns numbers around a decimal point. Independent of the number of digits, the decimal point will be in the same position. (We can align numbers around a decimal character only)

Bar Tab stop doesn’t position text. It inserts a vertical bar at the tab position. Desired Tab stop will be placed at the point in the present paragraph.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Question 4.
Explain Print Preview and Print Command?
Answer:
Print Preview. Print Preview displays the document as it will appear when printed. When we make a change to a print-related setting, the preview is automatically updated. To print preview of the document, following steps are used:
Click the File tab, and then click Print. To go back to our document, click the File tab.
A preview of our document automatically appears. To view each page, click the arrows below the preview.
Print Command. Print command is used to print a document using some printer. Following steps are followed to print a document in
MS-Word:

  • Click the File tab.
  • Click the Print command to print a document.
  • Click the Print button to print our document.
  • This dropdown shows the currently selected printer. Clicking the dropdown will display other available printers.
  • These dropdown menu show currently selected gettings.
  • Select the printer and other setting and click on Print.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Guide Office Tools Important Questions and Answers

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
What are the types in which PowerPoint files can be saved?
(a) PDF
(b) Video file
(c) Presentation
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 2.
What are the extension of an image file?
(a) .jPg
(b) .gif
(c) .bmp
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 3.
Which one is system software?
(a) Word
(b) Excel
(c) Windows
(d) PowerPoint
Answer:
(c) Windows

Question 4.
Mail merge is a feature of which software?
(a) Word
(b) Excel
(c) Windows
(d) PowerPoint
Answer:
(c) Windows

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Question 5.
Which one is not a type of office tools?
(a) Word Processing
(b) DBMS
(c) Multimedia Software
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Fill In The Blanks

1. Word processing tool prepares ………….. .
Answer:
Documents

2. Theme helps to choose ……………… in PowerPoint.
Answer:
Background

3. …………. is pre defined document structure.
Answer:
Template

4. ……………is used for calculation.
Answer:
Excel.

True Or False

Question 1.
Application software is used for specific work
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Any document can have two orientations.
Answer:
True

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Question 3.
Presentation can be saved as PDF.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
We cannot do calculations in Excel.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
Page margins are empty space in mid of page.
Answer:
False

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What are the different type of Softwares?
Answer:
System Software and Application Software.

Question 2.
Beneficial software for our work are called?
Answer:
Office tools.

Question 3.
Note pad is an example of?
Answer:
Word processing tool.

Question 4.
Give an example of spreadsheet software.
Answer:
MS Excel.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Question 5.
PowerPoint is an example of?
Answer:
Presentation tool.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question l.
What are Page Margins?
Answer:
Page margins pre the blank space around the edges of the page. In general, we insert text and graphics in the printable area inside the margins. When we change a document’s page margins, we change where text and graphics appear on each page.

Question 2.
Write steps of setting predefined page margins.
Answer:

  • On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click Margins. The margins gallery dropdown menu Will appear.
  • Click the margin type that we want to apply

Question 3.
Write steps to change Page Orientation.
Answer:

  • On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click Orientation.
  • Click Portrait or Landscape.

Question 4.
Write steps to apply different page orientations.
Answer:
1. Select the pages or paragraphs that we want to change to portrait or landscape orientation.
2. On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click Margins.

  • Click Custom Margins at the bottom of the dropdown menu.
  • A Page Setup dialog box will appear.
  • On the Margins tab, click Portrait or Landscape.
  • In the Apply to list, click Selected text or This point forward.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Question 5.
Write steps to apply custom margins.
Answer:

  • On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click Margins.
  • At the bottom of the margins gallery dropdown menu, click Custom Margins.
  • The Page Setup dialog box will appear.
  • Enter new values for the margins in all or some of the top, bottom, left or right text boxes.
  • Click OK.

Question 6.
Write steps to save presentation as PDF.
Answer:
Steps to save a presentation as a pdf file are:

  • Go to the backstage view under the File tab.
  • Click on Save As to open the Save As dialog.
  • Add a proper name to the file.
  • Select the file type as. .pdf from the list of supported file types and click save.
  • The .pdf file is created in the specified location.

Question 7.
Explain PPT broadcast slide show.
Answer:
PowerPoint 2010 offers users to broadcast their presentations on the internet to audience worldwide. Microsoft offers the free broadcast Slide Show service; all we need to do is share the link with our audience and they can watch the presentation from anywhere. There is no special setup or charges required to do this, all we need is a Windows Live account.

Question 8.
What is PPT Packaging Presentation?
Answer:
Certain presentations are better suited for distribution as a CD to audience. In such cases, we can create a CD packaging which can be burned into a CD and distributed. These CDs are called PPT packaging presentation.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write steps to save a presentation as a Video file.
Answer:
Saving Presentation as Video File:
PowerPoint allows presentations to be saved as files that can be posted on video sharing platform like YouTube or just played on any other-media.
Steps to save a presentation as a video file are:

  • Go to the backstage view under the File tab.
  • Click on Save As to open the Save As dialog.
  • Add a proper name to the file.
    PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools 1
  • Select the file type as .wmv from the list of supported file types and click Save.
  • The video creation is not an instant process like other file types as PowerPoint needs to create the video file. We can track the progress of video creation at the bottom of our presentation window.
  • Once the creation is complete, the video file is created in the specified location.

Question 2.
What are the steps of clearing Tab stops.
Answer:
Clear Tab Stops:
We can clear tab stops in a variety of ways, the simplest is going to the ruler, click and hold on the tab stop and drag in down towards the document. The tab stop will disappear. To quickly clear multiple tab stops and start fresh:

  • Click the Home tab, click the Paragraph Dialog Box Launcher.
  • A Paragraph box will appear, click on the Tabs button at the bottom left of the dialog box.
    PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools 2
  • A Tabs dialog box will appear.
  • In the list under Tab stop position, click the tab stop position that we want to clear, and then click Clear. To remove the spacing from all manual tab stops, click Clear All.
  • Click OK.

Question 3.
What are the ways to use Spell Check feature?
Answer:
Using the “Spell Check” Feature:
As we type our document, red wavy lines will appear under any word that is spelled incorrectly. The fastest way to fix spelling errors is to:

  • Put the cursor over the misspelled word and right click.
    PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools 3
  • A drop down box will appear with correct spellings of the word.
  • Highlight and left click the word you want to replace the incorrect word with.

To complete a more comprehensive Spelling and Grammar check, we can use the Spelling and Grammar feature:

  • Click on the Review tab.
  • Click on the Spelling & Grammar command.
    PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools 4
  • A Spelling and Grammar box will appear.
  • We can correct any Spelling or Grammar issue within the box.

Question 4.
Write steps to print a document.
Answer:
Print Command:
The Print tab is the place to go to make sure that we are printing what we want.

  • Click the File tab.
  • Click the Print command to print a document.
  • Click the Print button to print your document.
  • This dropdown shows the currently selected printer. Clicking the dropdown will display other available printers.
    PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools
  • These dropdown menu show currently selected Settings. Rather than just showing us the name of a feature,, these dropdown menu show us what the status of a feature is and describes it.

PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools

Question 5.
Write a note on Transition in PowerPoint.
Answer:
Transitions in MS – Power Point:
PowerPoint supports slide transition feature which allows us to specify how the slides should transition during the slide show.
PowerPoint presentation that had special effects between each slide, are slide transitions. A transition can be as simple as fading to the next slide or as complex as a flashy effect. This means we can choose transitions to fit the style of any presentation. There are three categories of unique transitions to choose from, all of which can be found on the Transitions tab:

1. Subtle (slight transitions)
2. Exciting (Strong Transition)
3. Dynamic Content (strong transitions that affect only the content, such as text or images)
PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools 5
The steps to add and preview slide transitions are:
1. Select the slide to which we want to apply the transition.
2. Go to the Transition Scheme under the Transitions ribbon.
PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools 6
3. Select one of the transition schemes from the list available. PowerPoint will instantly show us a preview of the scheme. If we are not satisfied, we can pick an alternate scheme. The last selected scheme will apply to the slide.

4. We can change the effects on the selected transition scheme from the Effect Options menu. Every scheme has a unique set of effect options.
PSEB 10th Class Computer Science Solutions Chapter 1 Office Tools 7
We can also modify the transition timing settings from-the Timing section. To preview the slide transition, click on Preview.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Social Science Book Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 10 Social Science History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

SST Guide for Class 10 PSEB Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality Textbook Questions and Answers

Answer the following questions in 20-25 words:

Question 1.
When and where Guru Gobind Singh Ji was born? Write the names of his parents.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji was born on December 22, 1666 at Patna. The name of his father was Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji. The name of his mother was Mata Gujri Ji.

Question 2.
Which games were played by Guru Ji in his childhood at Patna?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji played the game of mock battles. Guru Sahib also played the game of justice in a mock court along with his playmates. Guru Sahib also organised the wrestling bouts and-races during his childhood at Patna.

Question 3.
Name the teachers from whom Guru Gobind Singh Ji received his education.
Answer:
Qazi Pir Muhammad, Pandit Harjas, Rajput Bajar Singh, Bhai Sahib Chand and Bhai Mati Das were eminent teachers who taught Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Question 4.
What was the problem of Kashmiri Pandits? How did Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji solve it?
Answer:
Aurangzeb was forcibly converting Kashmiri Brahmins to Islam. Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji saved the Kashmiri Brahmins from that grave injustice by sacrificing his life.

Question 5.
Name the forts constructed by Guru Gobind Singh Ji after his victory of Bhangani.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji constructed the forts at Anandgarh, Keshgarh, Lohgarh and Fatehgarh after the battle of Bhangani (1690) at Anandpur Sahib.

Question 6.
Write names of the Panj Piaras.
Answer:
The names of the Panj Piaras were Daya Singh, Dharam Singh, Mokham Singh, Sahib Singh and Himmat Singh.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 7.
How did Guru Gobind Singh Ji attain martyrdom?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji toured South India in 1708. Guru Sahib stayed at Nanded (in Maharashtra) for some time. There a Pathan attacked Guru Sahib and inflicted a severe injury on his stomach with a dagger. Guru Sahib made the final union with Divine Power some time after that incident on October 7, 1708.

Question 8.
Which Banis are recited while preparing Khande Ka Pahul?
Answer:
The hymns of Japji Sahib, Anand Sahib, Jap Sahib, Swayas, Chaupais etc. are recited while preparing Khande Ka Pahul.

Question 9.
When and where was the Khalsa created?
Answer:
The work of the creation of the Khalsa was undertaken in 1699 at Anandpur Sahib on the day of Baisakhi.

Question 10.
What was the impact of the Khalsa on Bhim Chand, the king of Bilaspur?
Answer:
The Raja of Bilaspur, Bhim Chand was horrified due to the creation of the Khalsa. He made alliances with other Hill Chiefs against the Khalsa.

Question 11.
What was the earlier name of Muktsar? Why was it named so?
Answer:
The earlier name of Muktsar was Khidrana. A group of 40 Sikhs had deserted Guru Gobind Singh Ji during the second battle of Anandpur Sahib (1704 A.D.). However, they again came back to Guru Sahib after realising their mistake. They fought in the battle of Khidrana against the Mughals and achieved martyrdom. Those 40 martyrs were called 40 Muktas, (The word Mukta is derived from the word Mukti which means salvation). The place Khidrana was named Muktsar in the memory of those forty Sikh soldiers who had earlier deserted Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib pardoned them after they had repented at Khidrana.

Question 12.
To whom did Guru Ji write a letter named ‘Zafarnama’?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji wrote Zafarnama to Mughal emperor Aurangzeb.

Question 13.
Write the names of Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s four famous compositions.
Answer:
The four most popular literary works of Guru Gobind Singh Ji are Jap Sahib, Zafarnama, Akal Ustat and Shastra Nam Mala.

Answer the following questions in 30-50 words:

Question 1.
How did Guru Gobind Singh Ji spend his childhood at Patna?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji spent the first five years of his childhood at Patna Sahib. His maternal uncle Shri Kirpal Chand was his guardian. It is said that a Muslim saint named Bhikhan Shah from Ghuram (Patiala district^ visited Patna Sahib to have the divine glimpse of the child Gobind. The moment the Muslim saint looked at the child for the first time, he forecasted that the child would become a great man and lead the people on the right path. The forecast of the Muslim saint came out true. The signs of his greatness were visible even in his childhood. The child Gobind Das used to divide his friends into groups and organise mock battles. The child Gobind Das used to pay them even salaries in the form of sweets and cowries (small shells). The child Gobind Das used to play the role of a judge and settled disputes of his playmates. The child Gobind Das used to deliver judgements with great ability.

Question 2.
Write about the royal emblems of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji had also adopted the royal symbols like his grandfather Guru Hargobind Ji. Guru Sahib sat on a raised seat and also adorned his headgear with a crest. Guru Sahib also started calling meetings of the Sikhs under highly decorated and costly canopies. Guru Sahib also kept elephants and horses of the best breeds. Guru Sahib regularly went on hunting expeditions. Guru Sahib had also built Ranjit Nagara (the victory drum).

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 3.
Describe the principles of the Khalsa.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji created the Khalsa in 1699. Guru Sahib made the following rules for the Khalsa:

  • Every Sikh would add Singh (lion) after his name. Every Sikh woman would add word Kaur after her name.
  • Every person would join the Khalsa Panth after getting sprinklings and five palmfuls of Amrit (Sacred Water of Immortality) of Khande Ka Pahaul (Baptism of the Sword). Then only the baptized Sikh may call himself a Khalsa.
  • Every Sikh, must wear five Ks. which are Kesh (unshorn hair), Kanga (comb), Karra (the iron bangle), Kirpan (sword) and Kachchera ( a pair of shorts).
  • Every Sikh shall recite the five prayers after taking bath every morning, which are recited when the Khande Ka Pahaul is prepared.

Question 4.
What were the causes of the battle of Bhangani?
Or
Write any three reasons of the battle of Bhangani.
Answer:
The battle of Bhangani was fought between the Hill Chiefs and Guru Gobind Singh Ji. The causes of the battle were the following:

  1. The Hill Chiefs considered the military activities of Guru Gobind Singh Ji as dangerous to them.
  2. Guru Sahib was strongly against idol worship whereas the Hill Chiefs were highly devoted to idol worship.
  3. Guru Sahib had recruited 500 Pathans, in his army who had been disbanded from the Mughal army. The Hill Chiefs were the vassals of the Mughal government. They supported the enemies of Guru Sahib.
  4. The Mughal Faujdar had provoked the Hill Chiefs to take action against Guru Sahib.
  5. Guru Sahib had strained relations with Bhim Chand of Bilaspur. The Sikhs had not allowed the marriage party of the son of Raja Bhim Chand to pass through Poanta Sahib while proceeding to Kharwal. As a result, the Hill Chiefs decided to fight a battle against Guru Sahib.

Question 5.
Describe briefly the second battle of Anandpur Sahib.
Answer:
The second battle of Anandpur Sahib was fought in 1704. Earlier, in the first battle of Anandpur Sahib, Guru Gobind Singh Ji had given a crushing defeat t© the hill chiefs. In spite of signing a peace accord with Guru Sahib, the hill chiefs had again started military preparations. They were also joined by the Gujjars. The Mughal Emperor had also accepted their request for military help. As a result, the governor of Sirhind, Wazir Khan, had sent a big contingent against the Sikhs.

The army of all the allied forces besieged Anandpur Sahib. Guru Sahib effectively resisted the attack of the Mughals. However, the Sikhs had an acute shortage of provisions. The Mughal generals cut off all the means of communication and the Sikhs experienced great hardships. The Sikh army started facing starvation. A group of forty Sikhs signed a disclaimer (Badhawa) and thus deserted Guru Sahib. Finally on December 21, 1704, on the advice of Mata Gujari Ji, Guru Sahib, and the Sikhs vacated Anandpur Sahib.

Question 6.
Write a note on the battle of Chamkaur Sahib.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji reached Chamkaur Sahib from Anandpur Sahib after crossing the river Sirsa. Guru Sahib took position in a mud fort at Chamkaur where the armies of the Mughals and the Hill Chiefs besieged the fort. Guru Sahib gave them a tough fight. The two Sahibzadas of Guru Sahib, Sahibzada Ajit Singh and Sahibzada Jujhar Singh achieved martyrdom. Apart from that, thirty-five Sikhs also achieved martyrdom. The circumstances were not favourable for Guru Sahib. Hence the Sikhs pleaded with Guru Sahib to leave the place and Guru Sahib left for the jungles of Machchiwara along with his five Sikh devotees.

Question 7.
Describe the battle of Khidrana.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji reached Khidrana after the battle of Chamkaur Sahib. The last battle of Guru Sahib with the Mughals was fought at Khidrana. Those forty Sikhs who had deserted Guru Sahib in the second battle of Anandpur Sahib came back to Guru Sahib after repentance and fought for Guru Sahib in the battle of Khidrana. They gave a proof of their devotion and achieved martyrdom after defeating the Mughals. Their devotion and sacrifice impressed Guru Sahib so much that he forgave them for their, previous faults and granted them salvation or Mukti. Hence, the forty martyrs are remembered in the history as forty Muktas. Mai Bhago had also fought in the battle of Khidrana and was badly wounded. Guru Sahib won the battle and the Mughal army ran away for their life after suffering a crushing defeat.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 8.
Describe the personality of Guru Gobind Singh Ji as a general.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji was a great religious leader. Guru Sahib was also a successful military commander and a brave soldier. Guru Sahib fought battles forced upon him by the hill chiefs and the Mughals. But Guru Sahib fought every battle courageously and established himself as a successful General. Guru Sahib had complete mastery over swordplay, archery and horse riding. Guru Sahib had all the qualities of a commander of a high calibre. Guru Sahib had made the Mughals and hill chiefs to lick dust even with his lesspr number of soldiers and limited resources. During the battle of Chamkaur Sahib, Guru Sahib had hardly forty Sikhs in his army. But under his command, they displayed such a spectacular fighting power that the Mughal army of thousands failed to defeat them.

Answer the following questions in 100-120 words:

Question 1.
What do you know about the life of Guru Gobind Singh Ji?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji was the tenth and the last Guru of the Sikhs. Guru Sahib gave the final shape to the Sikh religion. After creating the Khalsa in 1699, Guru Sahib created the spirit of unity, courage and heroism among the Sikhs. Guru Sahib gave a strong reply to the oppression of the Mughals with his limited resources. Guru Sahib is remembered as a great spiritual leader, an organizer par excellence, a successful commander, a literary genius and a great social reformer. A brief description of his life history is as follows:

Birth and Parentage. Guru Gobind Singh Ji was born on December 22, 1666, at Patna. The name of the mother of Guru Sahib was Mata Gujari Ji. Guru Sahib was the only son of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji. Guru Sahib was originally (by birth) named Gobind Das. According to some scholars, Guru Sahib was later named as Gobind Rai.

Childhood Period at Patna. Guru Sahib spent the first five years of his childhood at Patna. Guru Sahib used to play such games which had revealed beforehand that one day the child Gobind Rai would become a great religious leader. Guru Sahib used to organise wrestling bouts and races of his playmates. Guru Sahib himself took part in the games. Guru Sahib used to divide his playmates into two groups and played mock battles. Guru Sahib used to hold his own court in his childhood to settle the disputes among his childhood friends. A Muslim saint, Sayyed Bhikan Shah, when he visited him from Ghuram had predicted that the child would become a great prophet one day.

Education. Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji started living with his family at Chak Nanki (Anadpur Sahib) from 1672. The arrangements for the education of the child Gobind Rai were made here by Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji. Guru Sahib studied Persian from Qazi Pir Muhammad and Sanskrit from Pandit Harjas. The Rajput Bajar Singh gave him training in horse riding and use of armaments. Guru Sahib learnt Gurumukhi from Bhai Sahib Chand and Bhai Mati Das.

Martyrdom of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji and Accession of Guru Gobind Singh Ji to Gaddi. Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji achieved martyrdom. In 1675 in order to save Kashmiri Pandits from the oppression of the Mughals. The child Gobind had himself enjoined upon his father to achieve martyrdom. After the martyrdom of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji, Guru Gobind Dass took over the responsibility of Guru Gaddi, which was granted to him by Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji himself and he guided the destiny of the Sikh community for the next thirty-three years.

Marriage. According to Sikh traditions, Gobind Das married three women-Bibi Jito, Bibi Sundari, and Bibi Sahib Devan. According to some historians, these are the names of one woman only. Guru Sahib was blessed with four sons. Their names were Sahibzada Ajit Singh, Sahibzada Jujhar Singh, Sahibzada Zorawar Singh and Sahibzada Fateh Singh.

Organization of Army. Guru Sahib had rightly realized the need of raising an army for the protection of Sikh religion. Hence, Guru Sahib ordained that a Sikh, who had four sons, should recruit his two sons in his army. Guru S&hib further advised them to make gifts of arms and horses in place of any other thing. As a result, soon Guru Sahib was able to collect enough military weapons to raise an army. Guru Sahib also employed 500 Pathan soldiers of Pir Buddhu Shah of Sadhana.

Magnificent Court and Royal Insignias of Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib had adopted royal insignias following the footsteps of his grandfather Guru Hargobind Ji. Guru Sahib occupied a raised throne and adorned his headgear with a crest (Kalghi). Guru Sahib held his court under magnificent canopies. Guru Sahib had also kept numerous elephants and horses of the best breeds. Guru Sahib regularly went on hunting expeditions in the jungles of Anandpur Sahib. Guru Sahib also constructed the Ranjit Nagara or the victory drum.

Guru Sahib in Poanta Sahib. Raja Bhim Chand of Bilaspur did not like the activities of Guru Sahib at Anandpur Sahib and became jealous of him. He feared the rising power of Guru Sahib. The Raja was trying to find an opportunity to pick up a quarrel with Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib knew it but he did not want to waste his military power in useless fights. Guru Sahib accepted the invitation of Raja Medni Parakash of Nahan to settle down in his state. In Nahan, Guru Sahib selected a scenic, peaceful and secluded place on the banks of river Yamuna. The place was named Poanta meaning a place where Guru Sahib rested his feet.

Guru Sahib brought 52 poets to Poanta Sahib. Guru Sahib composed many important literary works with the assistance of those poets. Guru Sahib got translated Ramayana and Mahabharata into Gurumukhi for the intellectual development of the Sikhs. Guru Sahib also made arrangements for imparting training in horse riding, archery, and swordplay to the Sikhs at Poanta Sahib.

Battles of the Pre-Khalsa Period,

  1. Guru Sahib was compelled by the circumstances to fight the battle of Bhangani. Guru Sahib defeated Bhim Chand of Bilaspur and Fateh Shah of Srinagar in the battle of Bhangani. It was the first battle and an important victory of Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib decided to leave Poanta Sahib after the battle and came back to Anandpur Sahib. Guru Ji built forts of Anandgarh, Lohgarh, and Fatehgarh at Anandpur Sahib.
  2. In the meantime, Aurangzeb who was in South India at that time got the reports of rising power of Guru Sahib. He directed his officers in Punjab in 1693, to start a war against Guru Sahib, As a result, the Faujdar of Kangra deputed his son Khanzada to lead an expedition against Guru Sahib. The Sikhs gave him a crushing defeat.
  3. In 1695, the Faujdar of Kangra deputed Hussain Khan against Guru Sahib. However, his expedition turned into a tussle with hill chiefs and the local Sikhs and he did not get the chance to trouble Guru Sahib, as he was killed.
  4. Shahzada Muazzam took many steps to crush the power of hill chiefs and Guru Sahib. Shahzada Muazzam succeeded in reducing the power of hill chiefs. However, Prince Muazzam did not act against Guru Sahib because Guru Sahib was highly respected by some of his officers.

Creation of the Khalsa. Guru Gobind Singh Ji created the Khalsa on the Baisakhi day in 1699 at Anandpur Sahib. Guru Sahib prepared Khande Ka Pahaul (Baptism of Sword) and administered it to his five Piyaras (chosen ones) named Daya Ram. Dharam Das, Mohakkam Chand, Sahib Chand and Himmat Rai. Guru Sahib added the word ‘Singh’ (Lion) to their names. Guru Sahib also added the word Singh to his own name.

Battles of the Post-Khalsa Period, The period after the creation of Khalsa is called the Post-Khalsa Period. Guru Gobind Singh Ji remained engaged in many battles during Post-Khalsa period. Guru Sahib fought the first battle of Anandpur Sahib in 1701, battle of Nirmoh in 1702, battle of Basoli in 1702, second battle of Anandpur Sahib in 1704, battle of Shahi Tibi and battle of Chamkaur Sahib in 1705. From Chamkaur Sahib, Guru Sahib reached Khidrana (Muktsar) after visiting places like Machchiwara, Dina etc. At Khidrana, Guru Sahib defeated the Mughal army in the last battle of his life in 1705. From Khidrana, Guru Sahib went to stay at Talwandi Sabo.

Death of Guru Gobind Singh Ji, Guru Gobind Singh Ji visited Nanded (Maharashtra) in 1708. The Faujdar of Sirhind had sent two Pathans to kill Guru Sahib. They used to visit the court of Guru Sahib occasionally. One evening, one of the Pathans got the opportunity to make a surprise attack on Guru Sahib and thrust a dagger into the stomach of Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib received a severe injury. On October 7, 1708, Guru Sahib made the final union with the Divine Power.

Question 2.
Why did Guru Gobind Singh Ji create the Khalsa?
Answer:
It was the glorious day in the history of Sikh religion when the saints of Guru Nanak Dev Ji were transformed into ‘Singhs’ the lions. They were transformed into such selfless soldiers who readily sacrificed their lives for the protection of their religion with smile on their faces, whenever any occasion demanded.

The great transformation took place in 1699, when Guru Gobind Singh Ji created Khalsa. Guru Sahib had created the Khalsa due to following reasons:
1. Contribution of the first Nine Guru Sahibans. The creation of Khalsa was the culmination of the work started by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. G.C. Narang remarks, “The harvest which ripened in the time of Guru Gobind Singh had been sown by Guru Nanak Dev Ji and watered by his successors. Guru Nanak Dev Ji had called upon the people to fight against injustice and for freedom from tyranny. After Guru Nank Dev Ji, the second, the third and the fourth Gurus consolidated the work begun by the first Guru. Guru Arjan Dev Ji had given to the Sikhs a holy book, a code and a treasury. He was addressed as “Sacha Padshah”. Guru Hargobind by his New Policy converted the Sikhs into saint-soldiers. The first four Guru Sahibs and the 8th Guru were peace loving but they did not make any changes in the basic policies of the other Gurus. The 9th Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji enjoined upon his followers to be brave, fearless, and courageous. By creating Khalsa, Guru Gobind Singh Ji, completed the process begun by his predecessors. In fact, all the elements of Khalsa are traceable in the doctrines given by the predecessors of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

2. Oppression ofAurangzeb. The atrocities committed by the Mughals on the Sikhs went on increasing during the period of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. Aurangzeb demolished Hindu temples and removed Hindus from the government services. He imposed more unjust taxes and restrictions on them. The most oppressive measure was the forcible conversion of the Hindus to Islam. The helpless Hindus had submitted helplessly to the continuous oppression. In fact, the very existence of Hindu religion in the Punjab was in danger. Guru Gobind Singh Ji was, severely opposed to any kind of oppression and had firmly resolved to fight against it. It was one of the main causes which led Guru Sahib to create Khalsa and to raise a strong army of the Sikhs.

3. Evil of Caste System. The Indian society was infested with social evils. The most crippling social evil was Caste System. The feelings of high and low caste were the major hurdles in achieving national unity. There was a big gulf between the Shudras and the Upper Classes in the society. There was a dire need of unity in the society. Guru Gobind Singh Ji furnished its solution by creating a united Khalsa. Guru Sahib wanted that the Khalsa should emerge as a united whole, dropping out all the caste considerations.

4. Aptitude of the Jats. The Jats had adopted Sikh religion in large numbers. The Jats were brave, fearless and had an inborn talent for battles. Guru Gobind Singh Ji needed a well-organised army to destroy the enemies of the Sikhs. Guru Sahib, therefore, encouraged the war loving Jats to adopt Sikh religion. Guru Sahib wanted to organise his followers and thus created the Khalsa.

5. Opposition of Hill Chiefs against Guru Gobind Singh Ji. Before the creation of Khalsa Panth, Guru Gobind Singh Ji had explored the possibility of raising a joint front against the oppressive Mughal Empire. Guru Sahib had learnt it from his experience that he could not bank upon the undependable hill people. Guru Sahib realised that the solution to the problem lay in raising their own army. Hence, Guru Sahib created the Khalsa.

6. To Strengthen Sikh Religion. One of the causes of the creation of Khalsa by Guru Sahib was that the people belonging to the factions of Meenas (Prithia’s sympathizers), Dhir Malia’s, and Ram Rai’s groups had been creating troubles for the Guru Sahibans before the period of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.Guru Gobind Singh Ji wanted to save the Sikh religion from such dishonest people and to establish discipline within the Sikh community. Guru Sahib, therefore, established the Khalsa Panth.

7. Corruption in the Masand System. The Masands were very helpful in the spread of the message of Sikh religion, during the period of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. However, gradually many shortcomings crept into the Masand System. The Masands started exploiting the Sikh ,devotees instead of guiding them on the right path. They had started misusing the donations and gifts for the Sikh Panth. A more disciplined organisation like the Khalsa was the need of the hour.

8. Need of a New Organisation. By the time of Guru Gobind Singh Ji, the Sikh community had acquired its own language, distinctive script, their own spiritual guide and their own original holy book. Now they were in need of a new organization. Guru Gobind Singh Ji fulfilled this need by creating the Khalsa.

9. Aim of the Life of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. Guru Gobind Singh Ji wrote ‘Bachitra Natak’ which is his autobiography. It states that Guru Sahib aimed at spreading the message of Sikh religion all over the worlds finish the oppression and protect the saints and noble souls. It was not possible to “achieve such an aim without organising an army of devoted soldiers. As a result, Guru Sahib created the Khalsa Panth.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 3.
What was the significance of creation of the Khalsa’?
Answer:
The creation of Khalsa was an epoch-making event in the history of the Sikhs. In the words of Dr. Hari Ram Gupta, a distinguished historian of Punjab, “The creation of Khalsa was an epoch-making event in the religious and political history of the country.”

The significance of creation of Khalsa can be studied, as under:
1. Completion of the work of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Nanak Dev Ji founded the Sikh religion. All his successors worked with great devotion for the progress of the Sikh religion. Guru Gobind Singh Ji completed the works started by Guru Nanak Dev Ji by creating the Khalsa.

2. End of the Masand System. The fourth Guru Sahib, Guru Ram Das Ji had started Masand system. The Masands had done commendable work by spreading and popularising the Sikh religion during the early years of their existence. However, by the period of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji, the Masands had degraded themselves by becoming selfish, greedy, and corrupt. Hence, Guru Gobind Singh Ji instructed his Sikhs to snap all their ties with the Masands, Consequently, the Masand system ended.

3. Importance of Khalsa Sangat Enhanced. Guru Gobind Singh Ji granted the right to Khalsa Sangat to prepare the Khande Ka Pahaul and of investiture for the new entrants to the Khalsa Panth. The Khalsa Sangat was also entrusted with the right to take decisions in a democratic way. Therefore, the importance of the Khalsa Sangat increased.

4. Rise in the number of the Sikhs. Guru Gobind Singh Ji united the Sikh« into a common bond of brotherhood, the Khalsa, by the investiture ceremony of Amrit’ from Khande Ka Pahaul. Guru Sahib Ji ordained, that from then onwards, any five Khalsa Sikhs could perform the investiture ceremony of ‘Amrit’ and admit the followers to Khalsa Panth. Consequently, the membership of the Sikh community increased by leaps and bounds.

5. Infused a New Spirit among the Sikhs. The Sikhs were filled with a new spirit of sacrifice by the creation of the Khalsa Panth. They started calling themselves the ‘Singhs’ (lions). By feeling like lions and being addressed as Singhs, their fears and cowardice disappeared. They started maintaining high moral standards in their conduct. Further, they felt themselves united with the end of caste considerations among them.

6. Brave and successful struggle against the Mughals. Guru Gobind Singh Ji had infused the Sikhs with a spirit of courage and fearlessness. Guru Sahib made his sparrows to tear hawks and his single burly soldier was ready to cross swords with one lakh soldiers. It actually happened in the battle of Chamkaur Sahib when forty Sikhs crossed swords with thousands of Mughal soldiers. As a result of the foundation of the Khalsa, the Sikhs successfully fought many battles against the Mughals’from 1699 to 1708.

7. Battles between Guru Gobind Singh Ji and the Hill Chiefs. The creation of Khalsa alarmed the hill chiefs. Especially, Bhim Chand of Bilaspur was highly perturbed and terrified by the military activities of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. Bhim Chand made alliance with the other hill chiefs in order to counter the rising power of Guru Sahib. As a result, Guru Sahib was compelled to fight battle against them.

8. Distinctive symbols of the Sikh Community. By the time of Guru Gobind Singh Ji, the Sikhs had acquired their exclusive sacred towns for pilgrimages. The Sikhs had their own holy book in ‘Adi Granth Sahib’. The Sikhs had by then their own distinctive festivals and customs. After the creation of Khalsa, they were given their own five sacred Ks. In this manner, they acquired distinctive outer symbols also, which made them a distinct religious sect.

9. Saviour of the Hindu Religion. Aurangzeb was cruelly oppressing the Hindus. The Singhs or the Khalsa offered him a stiff resistance. The people of other religions were much impressed by their examples and took courage to start a series of revolts against Aurangzeb. In this manner, the Hindu religion was saved from extinction especially in the North India.

10. End of Superstitions. The Khalsa did not accept the useless beliefs of the Hindus. The Khalsa stopped practising the Hindu ceremonies concerning sacrifices, Yajnas, fasting, Idol worship, etc. In this manner, with the coming of Khalsa, the clouds of superstitions and ignorance were cleared.

11. Popularity of the Democratic Principles. Guru Gobind Singh Ji initiated his Five Piyaras into the Khalsa Panth and then himself stood before them and asked them to initiate him into the Khalsa. Guru Sahib also ordained that any five Khalsas could initiate a person into the Khalsa Panth by performing the ceremony of initiation (Baptism).The Guru Sahib thus based the Khalsa Panth on sound democratic principles.

12. Rise of Political Power of the Sikhs. With the creation of the Khalsa, the spirit of heroism, fearlessness, courage, and self-sacrifice became alive forever among the Sikhs. Therefore, even after Guru Gobind Singh Ji had left the mortal world, the struggle of the Sikhs continued with the same force against the tyranny of the Mughals. Ultimately, they occupied a large part of the Punjab under the leadership of Banda Bahadur. They were severely persecuted by the Mughal governor of Lahore for some years after the death of Banda Bahadur, but they survived by establishing their reputation of being a courageous community which was firm in its resolve to destroy the Mughal power in the Punjab. By 1762, the powerful Sikh chiefs were able to establish their small independent states called the Misls.

Question 4.
Describe the Post Khalsa period battles of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
During the Post Khalsa Period Guru Gobind Singh Ji remained involved in the battles for a long time. A brief description of those battles is as follows:
1. The First battle of Anandpur Sahib 1701 A.D. The hill chiefs were perturbed by the creation of the Khalsa. Raja Bhim Chand of Bilaspur issued warning to Guru Gobind Singh Ji that either Guru Sahib should vacate Anandpur Sahib or pay the rent for his total stay in Anandpur Sahib. Guru Sahib declined to accept his unreasonable demand. Bhim Chand made a joint front with the other hill chiefs and attacked Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib boldly faced their attack and defeated them though he had a small army. After their defeat, the hill chiefs sought the help of Mughal army and again attacked Anandpur Sahib. They were again badly defeated. In desperation, they offered a peace treaty, which Guru Sahib accepted. According to the terms of the treaty, Guru Sahib retired to Nirmoh, which was two kilometres away from Kiratpur.

2. Battle of Nirmoh (1702). Raja Bhim Chand had learnt from his experience that it was not possible for him to destroy the Sikh power. Hence, he tried to seek the help of Mughals. In 1702, from one side, Raja Bhim Chand and from the other direction, the Faujdar of Sirhind with his Mughal army attacked Nirmoh. The Gujjars of surrounding areas also joined in the attack. The Sikh army fought their enemies with great courage. The fight continued for full one day and a night. Finally, the Sikh army succeeded in repulsing the attack.

3. Battle of Satluj (1702). Guru Sahib decided to leave Nirmoh after his victory in the battle of Nirmoh. Guru Sahib had hardly crossed the river Satluj, when the enemy armies again attacked the Sikhs. The battle continued for four hours in which Guru Sahib and the Sikhs emerged victorious.

4. Battle of Basoli. Guru Sahib came to Basoli after crossing the river Satluj. Even here,the army of Bhim Chand came chasing after him. The army of the Sikhs again defeated the army of Bhim Chand. As the Rajas of Basoli and Jaswan were the admirers of Guru Sahib, Bhim Chand found it in his own interest to sign a treaty with Guru Sahib. The treaty was signed in the middle of 1702. As a result, Guru Sahib came back to Anandpur Sahib. For next one year, Guru Sahib did not fight any battle.

5. The Second battle of Anandpur Sahib. The hill chiefs felt uncomfortable and did not relish the fact that Guru Sahib was stronger and more influential than them. Hence, they formed a joint front and asked Guru Sahib to vacate Anandpur Sahib. When Guru Sahib declined straightaway to accept their unreasonable demand, the hill chiefs reacted by attacking Anandpur Sahib. They suffered a humiliating defeat this time again. Now Bhim Chand and his allies adopted a new strategy to avenge their repeated defeats and sought the help of the Mughals. The Faujdar of Sirhind, Wazir Khan, brought his army.

Combined armies of Wazir Khan, the hill chiefs and the Gujjars attacked Anandpur Sahib. The Sikhs repulsed the attack on Anandpur Sahib. The enemy army besieged Anandpur Sahib and Mughal army cut off all the communication to Anandpur Sahib. The Sikh army faced starvation. The Sikhs suggested to Guru Sahib to vacate Anandpur Sahib but Guru Sahib refused to accept their suggestion. At that juncture, 40 Sikhs deserted Guru Sahib. Finally, on December 21, 1704, on the persuasion of Mata Gujari Ji, Guru Sahib vacated Anandpur Sahib.

6. Battle of Shahi Tibbi. The enemies occupied Anandpur Sahib after Guru Gobind Singh Ji had left if. They chased Guru Sahib. By the orders of Guru Sahib, Udai Singh along with his 50 Sikhs blocked the march of the big army of the enemy at Shahi Tibbi. All the Sikhs achieved martyrdom at Shahi Tibbi after killing thousands of enemy soldiers.

7. Battle of Sarsa. Guru Gobind Singh Ji proceeded further and reached the banks of river Sarsa. The enemy continued pursuing Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib deputed his devoted Sikh, Bhai Jeevan Singh Rangreta to check the advance of enemy forces. The Sikhs gave them a tough fight and caused them heavy losses.

At that time, the river Sarsa was in flood. However, Guru Sahib and his undaunting Sikhs plunged into the river along with their horses. Some of the Sikhs were swept away in the river. Some precious Sikh literature was also lost in the flood. During such a confusing situation, Mata Gujari Ji and two younger’Sahibzadas, SaKibzada Zorawar Singh and Sahibzada Fateh Singh were separated from the main party.

8. Battle of Chamkaur Sahib 1705. After crossing the river Sarsa, Guru Gobind Singh Ji reached Chamkaur Sahib. Guru Sahib camped in a mud house of a landlord of the village. The enemy army came in his pursuit and besieged the place. At that time, only 40 Sikhs and two Sahibzadas, Sahibzada AJit Singh and Sahibzada Jujhar Singh were present there with Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib gave the enemies tough fight even then. The three Piyaras and both the Sahibzadas achieved martyrdom. Guru Sahib was left with only five Sikhs. The situation was very unfavourable for Guru Sahib. On the persistent request by the Sikhs, Guru Sahib vacated the place and moved to the jungles of Machchiwara. Guru Sahib reached Khidrana after passing through Alamgir, Dina, etc.

9. Battle of Khidrana 1705. The battle of Khidrana was the last battle of Guru Sahib. Those forty Sikhs, who had given him disclaimer (Badhawa) in the second battle of Anandpur Sahib returned to him and joined the battle. Guru Sahib had two thousand Sikhs, who fought with an army of ten thousand Mughal soldiers. The forty Sikhs with him, who had realised their folly, showed exemplary courage and valour and achieved martyrdom fighting against the Mughals. The Guru Sahib was so much impressed by their bravery that he forgave them for their previous fault. Guru Ji blessed them and granted them salvation or Mukti and named Khidrana as Mukatsar in their memory.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 5.
What do you know about Guru Gobind Singh Ji as a man?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji occupies a very high place in the history of Sikh religion and also of India. Guru Sahib was epitome of supreme sacrifices, literary scholarship, a model of courage, forbearance, patience, high moral character and a practical leader of men. Guru Sahib was a rare combination of multiple qualities.

A brief description of Guru Sahib as a complete human being can be given as follows:
1. Impressive Personality. Guru Sahib had a charming and impressive personality. Guru Sahib was tall, fair, with a broad forehead and muscular body. There was a unique glamour on his face. Guru Sahib always carried weapons. Guru Sahib adorned his headgear with a crest (kalgi). Guru Sahib is fondly and respectfully called ‘Kalgidhar Dashmesh’ due to his imposing gait. It was not possible for a mortal being to escape his mesmerizing influence. Guru Sahib was affable, gentle and cheerful by nature. Guru Sahib possessed the qualities of patience, confidence and forbearance.

2. A dutiful son and an ideal father. Guru Sahib was a dutiful son and an ideal father. By helping his father, Guru Teg Bahadur Ji, in finding the right person to end the oppression of the Mughals by saying, “Who is more worthy than you, who is generous, holy and brave,” Guru Sahib proved that he was a dutiful son. Guru Sahib sacrificed all his sons for the protection of the religion. His two younger sons were bricked alive. His two elder sons achieved martyrdom. All the four died in the service of the Khalsa Panth. Guru Sahib respected the wishes of his mother. It was only on the advice of his mother that Guru Sahib vacated Anandpur Sahib.

3. High Moral Values. The life of Guru Sahib was based on high moral values. Guru Sahib never adopted dubious means in his life. Guru Sahib never compromised with falsehood whether it was war or peace time. His moral values earned him ful-fledged devotion of all the Hindus and Muslims. Guru Sahib never valued materialistic pleasures. It is a part of oral history that once a Sikh gifted him costly gold jewellery. Guru Sahib just threw it in the river.

4. Man of Firm Resolve. Guru Sahib was a man of firm determination. The ups and downs of life never made him leave his true path. Guru Sahib was hardly nine years old when his father sacrificed his life. His two younger sons were bricked alive. His two elder sons lost their lives in the battles for the cause of religion. His mother died of a shock at the tragedy of her two young grandchildren. No turmoil in his life succeeded in breaking his resolve to fight against injustice.

5. Tolerant in his Religious views. Aurangzeb had martyred Guru Teg Bahadur Ji just because he was not prepared to embrace Islam. But it did not make Guru Gobind Singh Ji a fanatic like him. Guru Sahib, a real saint, did not become revengeful towards the Muslims. Rather numerous Muslims were his ardent supporters and followers. Pir Muhammad, Buddhu Shah, Nihang Khan, Nabi Khan, Ghani Khan were such Muslims who admired and adored Guru Sahib for his religious tolerance and broadmindedness. There were numerous Turk and Pathan soldiers in his army. Guru Sahib himself made it clear in his Bachitra Natak that he had come on a divine mission to save his people from the wicked and tyrants.

6. A Literary Genius and Saint. Guru Sahib was a saint by nature. Guru Sahib was also a literary genius. Guru Sahib composed numerous verses in Persian, Hindi, and Gurumukhi. The Jap Sahib, Zafarnama, Bachitra Natak, Chandi di Var, etc. are his literary achievements. Guru Sahib enjoyed the company of his 52 poets. Guru Sahib was usually engrossed in deep meditation even on his hunting expeditions. Guru Sahib lived peaceful and most fruitful life at Talwandi Saboo. Guru Sahib was a role model for writers like Saina Pat and Bhai Nand Lai.

7. A Complete Man. Guru Gobind Singh Ji was a perfect example of a complete man. Guru Sahib was fearless, patient, and courageous. The creation of Khalsa and his literary works stand testimony to his genius. The most imposing and tyrannical Mughal empire of his times could not deter him from his resolves. Guru Sahib had made sacrifice of his four illustrious sons and his father Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji. But he did not leave the path of Truth. His secular and rational ideas are well revealed in Zafarnama. Guru Sahib won the hearts of all. Even during his lifetime, Guru Sahib was worshipped as a god. However, Guru Sahib did not like such practice of his followers and had reprimanded them. Guru Sahib was a saint in the real sense and as a man, an epitome of perfection that a man could ever achieve.

Question 6.
Describe the battles of Chamkaur Sahib and Khidrana.
Answer:
The battles of Chamkaur Sahib and Khidrana were the two most important battles fought by Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Both the battles took place during the Post Khalsa Period of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
1. Battle of Chamkaur Sahib 1705. Guru Sahib vacated Anandpur Sahib, crossed the river Sirsa, and reached Chamkaur Sahib along with his Sikhs. There were only forty Sikhs in his party which reached Chamkaur Sahib. His two Sahibzadas, Sahibzada Ajit Singh, and Sahibzada Jujhar Singh were also with him. Guru Sahib took shelter in a mud fort of Chamkaur Sahib. The enemies followed them there and besieged the fort.

The doughty Sikhs gave them a tough fight. Both the Sahibzadas demonstrated their valor and martial qualities. They achieved martyrdom after slaying many enemy soldiers. Three Piyaras out of the five Piyaras namely, Bhai Sahib Singh, Bhai Mohkam Singh, and Bhai Himmat Singh achieved martyrdom. Guru Sahib was left with only five Sikhs. The five Sikhs requested Guru Sahib to leave the fort. Guru Sahib left the fort along with Bhai Daya Singh and Bhai Dharam Singh. The remaining Sikh followers continued to fight till they achieved martyrdom.

Guru Sahib moved towards the jungles of Machchiwara and passed through Alamgir, Dina etc. and finally reached Khidrana.

2. Battle of Khidrana 1705(P6. 2011 (A)) Guru Sahib reached the place called Taba near Khidrana, where a large number of Sikhs had already assembled. Those forty Sikhs who had deserted Guru Sahib in the second battle of Anandpur Sahib also joined the followers of Guru Sahib at Khidrana. Mai Bhago had especially arrived to fight along with other Sikhs for Guru Sahib. It is said that nearly two thousand Sikhs had gathered there.

On the other side, with ten thousand soldiers Wazir Khan, the Subedar of Sirhind, came in pursuit of Guru Sahib. On September 29, 1705, a fierce battle was fought at Taba near Khidrana. Guru Sahib and his followers fought the battle with unbelievable courage and valour. They slew the enemy soldiers into pieces in large numbers. The
Mughal soldiers started losing battle because of thirst. Finally, the remaining Mughal soldiers ran away to save their lives. Mai Bhago was badly injured and the forty Sikhs, who had signed a disclaimer (Badawa) achieved martyrdom. It was a complete victory for Guru Sahib and his Khalsa. Guru Sahib appreciated the sacrifices of the forty Sikhs and tore their disclaimer in the presence of Bhai Maha Singh. Guru Sahib prayed for their deliverance and the forty martyrs became the forty Muktas in the history of the Sikh religion. Now Khidrana is called Muktsar in their memory.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Activity:

Question 1.
In the given map of Punjab, show any four places where battles mere fought by Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality 1

PSEB 10th Class Social Science Guide Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality Important Questions and Answers

Answer the following questions in one line or one word:

Question 1.
What was the childhood name of Guru Gobind Singh Ji?
Answer:
The childhood name of Guru Gobind Singh Ji was Gobind Dass Ji.

Question 2.
Give one main aim of the creation of the Khalsa.
Answer:
To end the tyranny of the Mughals.

Question 3.
Which kettledrum was made by Guru Gobind Singh Ji?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji got manufactured Ranjit Nagara, the victory drum.

Question 4.
Between whom was the first battle of Anandpur Sahib fought?
Answer:
It was fought between Raja Bhim Chand of Bilaspur and Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Question 5.
Which three different hill chiefs had formed a joint front against Guru Gobind Singh Ji in the second battle of Anandpur Sahib?
Answer:
The Rajas of Bilaspur, Kangra, and Guler.

Question 6.
When did the battle of Bhangani take place?
Answer:
The battle of Bhangani took place in 1688 A.D.

Question 7.
Write the names of those battles which Guru Gobind Singh Ji had fought during his Pre-Khalsa Period.
Answer:
The battle of Bhangani in 1688 and the battle of Nadaun in 1690.

Question 8.
How many persons had offered to sacrifice their lives on the command of Guru Gobind Singh Ji in the assembly of 1699 at Anandpur Sahib?
Answer:
Five persons.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 9.
Which are the two words attached to the name of each Khalsa men and woman?
Answer:
The word ‘Singh’ is affixed to the name of each rpale Khalsa and the word ‘Kaur’ to the name of each Khalsa woman.

Question 10.
Give the names of any two battles which Guru Gobind Singh Ji fought during his Post-Khalsa Period.
Answer:
The First Battle of Anandpur 2. Battle of Chamkaur.

Question 11.
Give the names of the two Sahibzadas of Guru Gobind Singh Ji who were bricked alive in a wall.
Answer:
Sahibzada Zorawar Singh Ji and Sahibzada Fateh Singh Ji.

Question 12.
What was the earlier name of Muktsar?
Answer:
The earlier name of Muktsar was Khidrana.

Question 13.
What does a Khalsa say to the other in salutation when they meet?
Answer:
Waheguru Ji Ka Khalsa, Waheguru Ji Ki Fateh.

Question 14.
At the time of creation of the Khalsa, who was the first person to stand up to sacrifice his life for the Panth?
Answer:
Daya Ram Khatri.

Question 15.
Where and when did Guru Gobind Singh Ji breathe his last?
Answer:
Nanded on 7 October, 1708 A.D.

Question 16.
Give the names of any two popular compositions of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
Jaap Sahib, Bachitra Natak.

Question 17.
What was the significance of the Battle of Bhangani?
Answer:
The victory of Bhangani rasied the prestige of Sikh army of Guru Sahib.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 18.
What was the earlier name of Muktsar?
Answer:
Khidrana.

Question 19.
Wazir Khan was the Subedar of which place?
Answer:
Sirhind.

Question 20.
When and where was the Khalsa created?
Answer:
On the Baisakhi Day in 1699 A.D. at Anandpur Sahib.

Fill in the blanks:

Question 1.
Guru Gobind Singh Ji spent first five years of his childhood at____________
Answer:
Patna

Question 2.
Guru Sahib created the Khalsa in ___________
Answer:
1699 A.D.

Question 3.
Guru Sahib constructed forts of___________
Answer:
Anandgarh, Keshgarh, Lohgarh, Fatehgarh

Question 4.
The first Battle of Anandpur Sahib 1701 was fought between __________ and __________
Answer:
Bhim Chand of Bilaspur and Guru Gobind Singh

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 5.
Guru Gobind Singh Ji made the final Union with Supreme God at __________ on __________
Answer:
Nanded, 7 October 1708 A.D.

Multiple Choice Question:

Question 1.
Where was Khalsa created by Gobind Singh Ji? Give the correct answer:
(a) Delhi
(b) Lahore
(c) Anandpur Sahib
(d) Patna.
Answer:
(c) Anandpur Sahib

Match the following:
table-1
Answer:
1. (e)
2. (b)
3. (d)
4. (c)
5. (a).

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write a brief note on the battle of Bhangani fought between Guru Gobind Singh Ji and the Hill Chiefs.
Answer:
The Hill Chiefs were perturbed by the military preparations of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. They, therefore, turned against Guru Sahib. In the meanwhile, an incident took place. Raja Bhim Chand of Bilaspur showed intentions to route the marriage party of his son through Poanta Sahib, But Guru Sahib, who knew about the bad intentions of the Hill Chief, did not permit him to pass through Poanta Sahib. Bhim Chand took it as his insult and after the completion of the marriage ceremony of his son, he formed a joint front of the hill chiefs and attacked Guru Sahib.

A fierce battle was fought at Bhangani, a place six miles away from Poanta Sahib. During the course of the battle, the Pathan soldiers (Afghans) and the Udasis deserted Guru Sahib. However, the situation was saved when a contingent of Buddhu Shah’s soldiers reached the battleground just in time. Buddhu Shah and his four sons and his seven hundred followers fought along with Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib gave a crushing defeat to the Hill Chiefs. It was the first victory of Guru Sahib in the battlefield.

Question 2.
Write a brief note on the creation of the Khalsa.
Answer:
In 1699, Guru Gobind Singh Ji called an assembly of his followers at Anandpur Sahib on the Baisakhi day. The assembly was attended by 80,000 people. When all the people present in the gathering settled down, Guru Sahib came on the stage, brandished his sword, and gave a call. “Is there any one who would lay down his life for Dharama?” There was no response for some time. Guru Sahib repeated his call three times. Finally, Daya Ram Khatri of Lahore stood up and offered himself.

Guru Sahib took him to a tent nearby from where Guru Sahib had given the call. Guru Sahib soon returned with his sword smeared with blood dripping from it. Guru Sahib again asked for another person to sacrifice his life. Then, four persons responded to his call one by one and they were Dharam Das, Mohkam Chand, Sahib Chand, and Himinat Rai.

Those five persons, who had offered themselves for sacrifice in response to the call of Guru Sahib, are remembered in the Sikh religion as Panj Piyaras—the Five Beloved Ones. Guru Sahib then gave them the Amrit’ prepared from Khande Ka Pahaul. They were consecrated as Khalsa and they became ‘Singhs’. After that, Guru Sahib himself received the ‘Amrit’ from the Punj Piyaras. In this manner, Guru Sahib Gobind Rai became Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 3.
Write four main achievements of Guru Gobind Singh Ji of his Pre- Khalsa Period (1675-1699).
Answer:
The four main achievements of Guru Gobind Singh Ji of his Pre-Khalsa Period are as follow:

  1. Raising of Army. Guru Sahib was hardly nine year’s old when his father Guru Teg Bahadur Ji achieved martyrdom. Guru Sahib wanted to save his religion from the tyranny of the Mughals and avenge the martyrdom of his father. Guru Sahib, therefore, raised his own army.
  2. Construction of Ranjit Nagara. Guru Sahib got constructed a kettledrum and named it Ranjit Nagara. It was beaten whenever Guru Sahib left for hunting.
  3. Construction of the fort of Poanta Sahib. Guru Sahib visited Nahan on the invitation of the ruler of Nahan Raja Medni Parkash. Guru Sahib got constructed the fort of Poanta Sahib there.
  4. Battle of Bhangani. In 1688, Raja Bhim Chand along with some hill chiefs attacked Guru Sahib. A fierce battle was fought at Bhangani. Guru Sahib inflicted a crushing defeat on the hill chiefs.

Question 4.
What is the significance (importance) of the creation of Khalsa in the Sikh history?
Answer:

  1. With the creation of Khalsa, the Sikhs became a community of Sant Sipahis. Before the creation of Khalsa, the Sikh community was a mere sect of worshippers of True Name. But with the establishment of Khalsa Panth, the use of sword became an inseparable feature of their creed. Gum Sahib had emphasized the importance of sword.
  2. The number of followers of Guru Sahib started increasing rapidly after the creation of Khalsa.
  3. The lower castes of Punjab got a new lease of life and their caste barriers were broken with the creation of Khalsa.
  4. The establishment of Khalsa infused the Sikhs with the spirit of courage and heroism. Even a humble Sikh was transformed into a roaring lion.

Question 5.
Describe any four important features of the personality and character of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji is known for the greatness of his character and personality.

  1. A Literary Genius. Guru Sahib was a literary genius par-excellence. Guru Sahib had unmatched mastery over Gurumukhi, Sanskrit, Persian and Hindi (Braj Bhasha). Guru Sahib composed standard literary works like Akal Ustat, Bachitra Natak, (Guru Sahib’s autobiography), Chandi di Var, and Zafamama.
  2. A Great Organiser-, Soldier, and Military Strategist. Guru Sahib was a great organizer, a seasonsed soldier and a military strategist. Guru Sahib created Khalsa to organise the Sikhs.Guru Sahib commanded and fought many battles. Guru Sahib also built numerous forts.
  3. A Great Saint and a Religious Leader. Above all, Guru Sahib was a great saint and a religious leader. Guru Sahib spread the message of Guru Nanak Dev Ji and taught the Sikhs to fight for the protection of their religion.
  4. A Great Social Reformer. Guru Sahib strongly opposed caste system and fought against other prevalent social evils.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 6.
Was Guru Gobind Singh Ji a Nation Builder? Support your answer with any four established facts.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji was definitely a nation builder.

  1. Guru Sahib was a builder par excellence. Guru Sahib raised an edifice on the strong foundation laid by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Sahib did not fight against the Mughals to establish a separate state but fought mainly to end the tyranny and oppression of the Mughals in the country. Guru Sahib did not have any religious contentions against Islam or the Mughals.
  2. Guru Sahib united the Sikhs in a bond of unity by creating the Khalsa. No class discrimination was observed in Khalsa Panth. Hence, the establishment of the Khalsa Panth was a national institution with the aims of unity and brotherhood of all the Indians.
  3. Guru Sahib composed the literature for the whole of humanity.
  4. The social reform activities of Guru Sahib were definitely motivated by the spirit of nation-building.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Describe in detail the battle of Bhangani,
Answer:
The battle of Bhangani was fought between Guru Gobind Singh Ji and the hill chiefs. The important Hill Chiefs who fought against Guru Sahib were Raja Bhim Chand of Bilaspur, Raja Kirpal Chand (Katoch) of Kangra, Fateh Shah, the ruler of Srinagar, Raja Gopal Chand of Guler and Raja Kesar Chand of Jasowal. Raja Bhim Chand was the leader of Hill Chiefs.

Causes. The main causes of the battle of Bhangani fought between Guru Sahib and the Hill Chief were, as follow.
1. Guru Sahib had started recruiting his followers in his army. They were being imparted training in horse riding, use of arms and hunting. In addition, Guru Sahib had collected a larger number of weapons. Guru Sahib advised his followers to donate horses and arms in place of cash and kind. The hill chiefs felt uncomfortable with the rising military activities of Guru Sahib.

2. The hill chiefs were ardent believers in Idol worship. But Guru Sahib strongly condemned this practice at Poanta Sahib.

3. The lifestyle of Guru Sahib was highly aristocratic and majestic. The hill chiefs were jealous of him because of his high standard of living. They feared that if Guru Sahib tried to acquire political power, they would stand in no comparison with Guru Sahib.

4. While Guru Sahib was making military preparations in the hill regions, the hill chiefs feared that it could push them into an undesirable conflict with Emperor Aurangzeb.

5. The Sikh followers used to give precious and costly gifts to Guru Sahib. It became a major cause of jealousy of the hill chiefs.

6. The immediate cause of battle of Bhangani was that Raja Bhim Chand of Bilaspur intentionally wanted to pass the marriage party of his son through Paonta Sahib. Guru Sahib knew about the wrong intentions of Raja Bhim Chand and denied him the passage. Raja Bhim Chand took it as his insult and became revengeful. Soon after, he raised a joint front with other hill chiefs and attacked Guru Sahib.

7. Events of the Battle. A huge army under” the leadership of Raja Bhim Chand marched towards Paonta Sahib. Guru Sahib also sent his forces to meet the enemy in a battle at Bhangani, a place near Paonta Sahib. Guru Sahib faced some problem in the beginning of the battle. However, Guru Sahib gave tough fight evtfn in such a situation. A hard contested battle continued and Guru Sahib suffered some initial reverses. On that every occasion, Buddhu Shah of Sadhora arrived and joined Guru Sahib. The situation completly turned in favour of Guru Sahib after that. The enemy lost confidence and the hill chiefs totally became frustrated. Soon after, a large number of enemy soldiers were chopped off by the swords of the Sikhs and the hill chiefs ran away for their safety.

8. Importance of the Battle.

  1. The victory at Bhangani raised the prestige of the Sikh army of Guru Sahib.
  2. Guru Sahib was fully convinced that he could successfully end the tyranny of the Mughals by organizing and training his followers.
  3. The hill chiefs dropped the idea of fighting against Guru Sahib and decided to cultivate friendship with Guru Sahib.
  4. After the victory of Bhangani, Guru Sahib decided to leave Paonta Sahib and returned to Anandpur Sahib.
  5. Raja Bhim Chand of Bilaspur specifically adopted the policy of friendship towards Guru Sahib. The period of peace and friendship with the hill chiefs was used by Guru Ji to raise the four forts in Anandpur Sahib, which were Anandgarh, Keshgarh, Lohgarh, and Fatehgarh.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 2.
Write on the personality and character of Guru Gobind Singh Ji under the headings as given below:
1. An Organiser Par-Excellence
2. A True Saint and a Religious Leader
3. A Social Reformer
4. A Poet and Literary Genius.
Answer:
An Organiser: Par-Excellence:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji was a great organizer. Guru Sahib had proved his amazing ability as an organiser by creating the Khalsa. Guru Sahib united the scattered Sikh community suffering from the evils of social and religious conflicts into a brotherhood by the creation of Khalsa. Guru Sahib was the first Indian leader, who popularized the principle of democracy and helped Indians to learn to follow the directives of Gurumutta or the directives of Sangat.

As a Saint and Religious Leader:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji was first and foremost a great religious leader. Patience and forbearance were the prominent features of his personality. Guru Sahib did not have any grudge against Islam. But he did not favour an attitude of meekly submitting to any kind of tyranny in the nam’e of saintly pursuits. The aim of creation of Khalsa was to end tyranny and oppression. Guru Sahib was a religious leader who respected all other religions as he respected the creed of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Guru Sahib was equally a saintly person. Guru Sahib had firm faith in one Supreme God and attributed all his acts to His name. Being a saintly person, Guru Sahib had never coveted any materialistic or worldly gains.

As a Social Reformer Guru Sahib was a great social reformer. Guru Sahib had strongly condemned the social evils like caste system, idol worship, etc. The Khalsa-Panth was open to people of all castes and tribes without any discrimination. The people who were considered as drudges of humanity, and had lived like slaves of higher classes, became under the inspiring leadership of Guru Gobind Singh Ji, doughty warriors. They took up the responsibility of protection of the country and religion. Guru Sahib had opposed the irrational ceremonies, sacrifices, Yajnas, etc. and helped to reform the society.

As a Poet and a Literary Genius (Scholar) :
Guru Gobind Singh Ji was a poet and scholar of high merit. Guru Sahib had mastery over Gurumukhi, Sanskrit, Persian, and Hindi. Guru Sahib enjoyed composing verses in all the languages of his choice. His poetry is alive with the spirit of heroic deeds (Vir rasa) and deep religious and mystic insight. The most popular compositions of Guru Sahib are Jap Sahib, Zafarnama, Chandi di Var, Akal Ustat, and Bachitra Natak. Guru Sahib always enjoyed the company of the scholars and poets.

At Poanta Sahib, Guru Sahib had gathered 52 poets. Guru Sahib even got translated Ramayana and Mahabharta and other ancient books into Hindi and Gurumukhi. While at Talwandi Sabo, Guru Sahib produced numerous literary works and earned the epithet of Guru Ki Kashi for Talwandi Sabo. A large number of scholars had gathered around him at Talwandi Sabo who were highly inspired by the scholarship of Guru Sahib. The most famous Sikh scholars, who were influenced by Guru Sahib, were Saina Pat and Bhai Nand Lai. Saina Pat composed Guru Shoba and Nand Lai composed Zindagi Nama in praise of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Question 3.
Describe the creation of Khalsa.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji created the Khalsa in 1699. It is considered as the foremost event in the history of Sikh religion. Guru Sahib took the following steps to create Khalsa:
1. Selection of Panj Piyaras (the Five Beloved Ones). Guru Gobind Singh Ji established the Khalsa Panth on the day of Baisakhi in 1699. Guru Sahib convened an assembly of his Sikh followers at Anandpur Sahib. On that day, his nearly 80000 Sikh followers gathered there. When all the people had settled down, Guru Sahib arrived in the meeting and sat on a raised platform. Guru Sahib brandished his sword and gave a call, “Is there any true Sikh of mine, who is ready to die for Dharma?” First, there was complete silence in the meeting for sometime. Then, Daya Ram Khatri of Lahore stood up and presented himself to the Guru. Guru Sahib took Daya Ram to a nearby tent and returned after sometime with a sword with blood dripping from it. Guru Sahib repeated his call. The second time Dharam Dass Jat of Delhi offered himself. Guru Sahib took him to the tent.

Finally, Guru Sahib, in this way, accepted three more Sikhs one by one. They were Mohkam Chand, Sahib Chand, and Himmat Rai. Guru Sahib was actually trying to check the loyalty of the-Sikh followers. Guru Sahib’s followers did not disappoint him. They won Guru Ji’s favour by this event. Finally, Guru Sahib brought all the chosen ones and raised them to the position of Panj Piyaras or the Five Beloved Ones.

2. Khande Ka Pahaul. After choosing his Panj Piyaras, Guru Sahib bestowed upon them the Amrit from Khande Ka Pahaul. For preparing Khande Ka Pahaul, Guru Sahib asked for an iron vessel. The vessel was filled with pure water, some ‘Patasas’ were added, and the water was stirred with a double-edged dagger by one of the Panj Piyaras. The sacred hymns of the Gurus from, the Adi Granth Sahib, namely Jupji Sahib, Anand Sahib, Chaupais and Sawayas were recited simultaneously. The water which was prepared thus was ‘the Amrit’ or the ‘Sacred Water of Immortality’.

The procedure adopted by Guru Gobind Singh Ji was his new procedure to prepare the Amrit. It was first bestowed upon the Panj Piyaras. Then Guru Sahib instructed them to kneel down and gave them the instruction to give a call, “Waheguru Ji Ka Khalsa, Shri Waheguru Ji Ki Fateh.” Guru Sahib sprinkled the Amrit on their faces and heads. Guru Sahib called each of them as Khalsa and attached the word ‘Singh’ to their names. After that, Guru Sahib received the Amrit himself from the Panj Piyaras. Guru Sahib then revealed that every step was directed by the Divine Power.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 5 Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s Life, Creation of Khalsa and his Personality

Question 4.
Describe briefly the principles of the Khalsa Panth. Also state the significance of creation of Khalsa.
Answer:
The Principles of Khalsa Panth.

  1. The person, who wanted to join the Khalsa Panth, should first receive Khande Ka Pahaul.
  2. Every Sikh was to add ‘Singh’ (lion) after his name and every woman, ‘Kaur’ after her name.
  3. The Sikhs were given distinguished marks. They were to wear five Ks.  Kesh (unshorn hair), Kangha (comb), Kara (Iron bangles), Kachchera (a pair of shorts), and Kirpan (dagger).
  4. The Khalsa was to believe in one God and abstain from idol worship.
  5. Every Khalsa was to take bath in the morning and recite the five prayers of Japji Sahib, Jap Sahib, Anand Sahib, Chaupai, and Sawaya’s.
  6. Every Khalsa was to earn his livelihood by the right means. Every Khalsa would donate Daswandh for religious activities.
  7. The Khalsa would not practice the Caste System.
  8. Every Khalsa would sacrifice everything for the Guru and the Khalsa Panth.
  9. Every Khalsa was to put on weapons and remain ready to fight for the protection of the Sikh religion.
  10. The Khalsa was not to use intoxicants and tobacco.
  11. The Khalsa was to lead high moral life.
  12. The salutation of the Sikhs was to be Waheguru Ji Ka Khalsa, Shri Waheguru Ji Ki Fateh.’

Significance of the creation of the Khalsa
By the creation of Khalsa, the great Guru laid the foundation of a brotherhood which produced in the fullness of time, men of uncommon bravery, unique devotion, and rare spirit of sacrifice. Men like Banda Bahadur, Bhai Mani Singh, Baba Deep Singh, Bhai Taru Singh, and Jassa Singh Ahluwalia were among those which the Khalsa produced within only fifty years of its creation. Secondly, the creation of Khalsa converted Sikhs into a race of saint-soldiers. Though the Sikhs worshipped the Supreme Being at heart, they were ready to take up arms against injustice and oppression.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Social Science Book Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 10 Social Science Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

SST Guide for Class 10 PSEB Basic Concepts Textbook Questions and Answers

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Define national income.
Answer:
According to Dernburg, “National income may be defined as the factor income in the form of rent, wages, interest and profit of the normal residents of a country in one year. It is composed of domestic factor income and net factor income from abroad.”

Question 2.
Define per capita income.
Answer:
Per capita income is the average income of the people of a country in a definite period of time. In other words,
Per Capita Income = \(\frac{\text { National Income }}{\text { Population }}\)

Question 3.
What is meant by consumption?
Answer:
Use of goods and services produced in order to satisfy human wants is called as consumption. In other words, consumption means expenditure made on consumption during one year in an economy.

Question 4.
What is meant by average propensity to consume?
Answer:
Average propensity to consume is the ratio of consumption to income. In other words,
Average Propensity to Consume = \(\frac{\text { Consumption }}{\text { Income }}\)

Question 5.
Define Investment.
Answer:
An addition to capital is called investment. During a year that part of income which is not spent on consumption but is saved for the use of capital formation is called investment.

Question 6.
What is meant by induced investment?
Answer:
Induced investment is that investment which depends upon the level of income and profit. Most of the private investment is induced investment.

Question 7.
What is meant by autonomous investment?
Answer:
That investment which is independent of the changes in the level of income, output and profits, is called as autonomous investment. Most of public investment or government investment is autonomous investment.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 8.
What is capital formation?
Answer:
Net investment in fixed assets, i.e., additions to the stock of physical and human capital, is known as capital formation.

Question 9.
What is meant by disguised unemployment?
Answer:
A person is said to be disguisedly unemployed if his contribution in the total product is almost zero or negligible. Thie type of unemployment is normally found in most of the agricultural dominated under-developed countries of the world.

Question 10.
Define full employment.
Answer:
Full employment signifies a situation in which all those who are willing to work at the current wage rate get work.

Question 11.
What is meant by inflation?
Answer:
Inflation signifies increase in the level of prices and consequent deterioration in the value of money over a period of time. In the words of Crowther, “Inflation is a state in which the value of money is falling, i.e., prices are rising.”

Question 12.
What is meant by supply of money?
Answer:
Generally money supply means currency and deposits of banks available with the people of the country. Broadly speaking, there are two constituents of money supply:

  1. Currency and
  2. Bank deposits.

Question 13.
Write a note on the government budget.
Answer:
Government Budget is an annual statement of estimated revenue and expenditure of the government. Indian Government generally present its budget in Lok Sabha on Feb 28th of every year.

The government budget can be of three types:

  1. Balanced Budget
  2. Surplus Budget &
  3. Deficit Budget.

Question 14.
What is meant by deficit financing?
Answer:
Deficit financing is the method by which government meets the budgetary deficits by taking loans from the Central Bank. Central Bank meets this deficit by printing new currency notes. In the same way when aggregate expenditure exceeds aggregate revenue then the government has to face deficit.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 15.
How many people are considered to be below poverty line in India?
Answer:
The Planning Commission has defined the poverty line on the basis of the ‘ recommended nutritional intake of 2,400 calories per person per day for rural areas and 2,100 calories for urban areas. On this basis, in rupee terms, the poverty line works out at? 972 per head per month for rural areas and at? 1407 per head per month for urban areas, both at the 2013-14 prices. In the year 2014-15 in India 29.8 percent people were below poverty line.

Question 16.
How growth rate is determined?
Answer:
Growth rate is that percentage rate from which it is known that in comparison to one year how much percentage change has taken place in national income or per capita income in any other year.

It is calculated by using following formula:
Growth Rate = Change in Per Capita Income × 100/Original Capita Income.

Question 17.
What is meant by foreign aid?
Answer:
By foreign aid, we mean the inflow of external assistance in the form of foreign capital, loans, grants apd assistance by foreign countries, private individuals, business organisations, foreign banks and international organisations.

Question 18.
Define balance of payments.
Answer:
Balance of payments is a statement of systematic record of all economic transactions between one country and the rest of the world (or foreign countries). Thus the account of receipts and payments of the government of one country from other countries during a period of one year is called Balance of Payments. In the words of Kindleberger, “Balance of payments is a systematic record of all economic transactions between the residents of the reporting country and residents of foreign countries during a given period of time.”

Question 19.
What is meant by fiscal policy?
Answer:
The policy of the government regarding income and expenditure is known as fiscal policy. As a matter of fact, fiscal policy is the policy of any govt, regarding its expenditure, taxation, borrowing, budget to achieve the various macro-economic objectives.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Define National Income. What is the difference between National Income and Domestic Income?
Answer:
National income is defined as the sum total of factor incomes viz. rent, wages, interest and profit accruing to the normal residents of a country for their productive services during a definite period of time i.e. one year. Income is a flow. Thus national income is the earned income by the normal residents of a country during one year. Domestic income equals national income minus net factor income from abroad. In other words,

Domestic Income = National Income – Net Factor Income From Abroad Net factor income from abroad is the difference between the income received by the residents of a country from abroad for providing factor services and the income paid for the factor services provided by the non-residents in the domestic territory of a country.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 2.
What is meant by Per Capita Income? How can you estimate Per Capita Income?
Answer:
Per capita income is considered to be a better measure of economic progress as compared to that of national income.

Per capita income is the average income of the people of a country in a definite period. Obviously per capita income is the average income. Thus, per capita income does not mean that each and every individual of the country is having income equal to it. Some people might be having income greater than it and some less than it. For example, the per capita income of India at current prices in 2013-14 was ₹ 74380 and that of Punjab was ₹ 74606.

Per capita income can be calculated by dividing national income by the population.
In other words,
Per Capita Income = \(\frac{\text { National Income }}{\text { Population }}\)

Question 3.
What do you mean by Consumption? Define Average Propensity to Consume and Marginal Propensity to Consume.
Answer:
The word consumption is used in two senses viz. a process and an expenditure. Thus consumption is that process which satisfies human wants directly like the use of food for the satisfaction of hunger. In the expenditure sense consumption means that total expenditure which is incurred on the consumption goods.

Average propensity to consume is defined as the ratio of consumption to income.
According to Prof. Peterson, “A.P.C. is the proportion of a given income that is spent for consumption purposes.” In other words,
A.P.C = \(\frac{\text { Consumption }}{\text { Income }}\)

Marginal Propensity to Consume (M.P.C.) is defined as the ratio of change in consumption to change in income.
According to Prof. Kurihara, “M.P.C. is the ratio of change in consumption to change in income.” In other words,

Question 4.
What do you mean by Savings? Define Average Propensity to Save and Marginal Propensity to Save.
Answer:
Saving is the difference between income and consumption. In the words of Keynes, “Saving is the excess of income overconsumption.” In other words,

Saving = Income – Consumption
Average Propensity to Save (A.P.S.): A.P.S. is the ratio of saving to income. In other words,
A.P.C = \(\frac{\text { Saving }}{\text { Income }}\)

Marginal Propensity to Save (M.P.S.): M.P.S. is defined as the ratio of change in saving to change in income. In other words,
M.P.S = \(\frac{\text { Change in Saving }}{\text { Change in Income }}\) or \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{S}}{\Delta \mathrm{Y}}\)

Question 5.
Define investment. What are the elements of determining the Investment?
Answer:
Investment, in economics, signifies nothing but addition to capital. It is defined as the surplus of total production over total consumption. Investment is necessary for increasing the production capacity in the economy. According to Mrs. Joan Robinson, “By investment is meant an addition to capital, such as occurs when a new house is built or a new factory is built. Investment means making an addition to the stock of goods in existence.”

Determinants of Investment: Investment primarily depends upon two factors :

  1. Expected rate of profitability or Marginal Efficiency of Capital (M.E.C.),
  2. Rate of Interest or Cost of Investment.

A rational businessman will invest only if M.E.C. is more than the rate of interest. On the contrary, if the rate of interest seems to be greater than M.E.C., then there will be no inducement to invest.

Question 6.
What is meant by Capital Formation? What is the difference between Gross Capital Formation and Net Capital Formation?
Answer:
In economic term that part of income by which more production is possible than before, is called capit’al formation. In other words, an addition to capital stock is called capital formation.

Gross capital formation: Gross capital formation signifies gross investment which includes within itself net investment and depreciation.
Net capital formation. Net capital formation signifies nothing but net investment.
Net capital formation = Gross capital formation – Depreciation
As a matter of fact, capital formation means increase in net investment.

Question 7.
Define disguised unemployment. Explain it with the help of an example.
Answer:
Disguised employment is that situation when more number of labourers are engaged in a work than actually required for it. It means there are some extra or excess workers engaged in that work. This can be explained with the help of an example. Suppose any family has a farm of 3 acres. Three members of that family can work efficiently in this farm with the existing methods of cultivation. But if that family has 6 “members and due to the shortage of employment opportunities in other fields, all of the 6 workers are employed in that farm, then it will be said that out of these 6 the 3 workers are actually disguisedly unemployed.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 8.
What is meant by full employment? What is the meaning of Structural Unemployment and Technical Unemployment?
Answer:
Full employment signifies” a situation in which all those who are willing to work at the current wage rate are able to get work. In other words, full employment means absence of involuntary unemployment.

Structural unemployment. Unemployment which arises due to structural changes in the economy is called as structural unemployment.

Technical unemployment: Unemployment which arises due to changes in the techniques of production is known as technical unemployment.

Question 9.
What is meant by inflation? Explain it.
Answer:
In Economics, the constant rise in prices is called inflation. In the words of Shapiro, “Inflation is a continuous and extreme rise in general price level.”

According to Crowther, “Inflation is a state in which the value of money is falling, i.e., prices are rising.”
From the above definitions, it is clear that inflation is a process of continuous rise in prices and hence fall in the value of money.

There are various causes of inflation. But the main cause of inflation is the excess of demand over supply. When the demand for goods exceeds the supply of goods, prices start rising and hence the problem of inflation arises.

Question 10.
What is Budget? What are the main components of income and expenditure in the budget of Indian Govt.?
Answer:
Budget is a statement of expected income and expected expenditure of the govt, for the given financial year. When the govt, levies taxes and incurs public expenditure, it comes under the purview of budget. Thus govt, budget is a sort of financial plan which includes within itself both income and expenditure. Traditionally, the budget is presented once in a year by the govt. The Govt, of India normally presents the budget in the Lok- Sabha on Feb. 28 or 29.

The main items of budget of the Govt, of India are as follows :
Items of Revenue. “Corporate tax, Income tax, Import and Export duties, Central Excise, Central Sales Tax, Gift tax, etc. are the main sources of income.
Main items of Expenditure. Security, Police, Administration, Education, Health, Social welfare, Industry, Agriculture, Planning, Rural development etc. are the main heads of expenditure.

Question 11.
Define deficit financing. What methods are included in it?
Answer:
Deficit financing is the method by which government meets the budgetary deficits by taking loans from the Central Bank. Dr. V.K.R.V. Rao has defined deficit financing as “the financing of a deliberate created gap between public revenue and public expenditure, the method of financing resorted to being borrowing of a type that results in a net addition to national outlay or aggregate expenditure.”

There are three important techniques through which the govt, may finance its budgetary deficits.

They are as follows:

  • Borrowing from Central Bank i.e., creation of new money.
  • The running down of accumulated cash balances.
  • The govt, may issue new currency.

It is, thus, obvious that all these methods lead to an increase in the supply of money. The increase in money supply normally causes prices to rise. In India, a major part of the budgetary deficit is financed through borrowing from the Central Bank.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 12.
What is meant by Public Finance? Explain direct and indirect taxes, with examples.
Answer:
Public finance deals with the income and expenditure of public authorities. Public authorities include all sorts of governments. Hence it can be said that it deals with the finances of the Govt. Central, State, and Local that are studied in the science of public finance. Prof. Dalton defined public finance as: “It is concerned with the income and expenditure of public authorities and with the adjustment of one to another.” In short, public finance is a study of the nature and principles of state expenditure and state revenue.

Direct Tax: A direct tax is one that cannot be shifted or passed on. It implies that in the case of direct taxes the impact or immediate money burden and the incidence or the ultimate money burden are on the one and the same person. According to Dalton, “A direct tax is really paid by a person on whom it is legally imposed.”

In the group of direct taxes, thus, income tax, wealth tax, property tax, estate duties, capital gains tax may be included.

Indirect Tax: An indirect tax is one that can be shifted or passed on. In case of indirect taxes, the immediate money burden and the ultimate money burden of taxes are on different persons. According to Dalton, “An indirect tax is imposed on one person, but paid partly or wholly by another.” Commodity taxes or sales tax, excise duties, etc. may be grouped as indirect taxes.

Question 13.
What is meant by Public Expenditure? How many types of public expenditure are possible?
Answer:
Public Expenditure: The expenditures incurred by the government are called Public Expenditures.

These can be of four types :

  1. Public Works. The expenditure incurred on the roads, dams and bridges etc.
  2. Public Welfare Works. The expenditure incurred on education, public health etc.
  3. The expenditures on the security and law and order of the country like on Police, Prisons etc.
  4. The expenditure on subsidies given to the producers to increase production, exports and transfer payments.

Question 14.
Explain the concept of‘Poverty Line’. What are the limits of poverty line in India?
Answer:
The concept of poverty line is used to measure poverty in a country. The people who are living below the poverty line are called as poor.

Poverty line signifies a sum that is needed by a person to meet his minimum consumption needs per month. In other words, by poverty line we mean that sum which is required by a person monthly to meet his minimum needs (food, clothing, housing, education and health, etc.).

Limits of Poverty line in India—In their book “Poverty in India”, V.M. Dandekar and Nilkanth Rath are of the opinion that all those who do not get food worth 2,250 calories are to be considered as poor. In order to get food worth 2,250 calories, the per capita monthly income in the rural areas and the urban areas must be ₹ 15 and ₹ 22.5 respectively at 1960-61 prices.

The Planning Commission has defined the poverty line on the basis of the recommended nutritional intake of 2,400 calories per person per day for rural areas and 2,100 calories per person per day for urban areas. On this basis, in rupee terms, the poverty line works out at ₹ 1407 per head per month for rural areas and ₹ 972 per head per month for urban areas both at the 2013-14 prices. 21.9 per cent of population was below poverty line in India during 2011-12.

Question 15.
Define Growth Rate. How it can be calculated?
Answer:
Growth rate is that percentage rate from which it is known that in comparison to one year how much percentage change has taken place in national income or per capita income in any other year.

Growth rate is calculated by using the following formula:
Per Capita Income Growth Rate = \(\frac{\text { Change in Per Capita Income }}{\text { Original Per Capita Income }}\) × 100

The calculation of growth rate may be made clear with the help of an example. Suppose in 2001 the per capita income of India was ₹ 10,000 and it increased to ₹ 12,000 in 2002. Clearly, the change in per capita income = 12,000 – 10,000 = ₹ 2000.
Initial Per Capita Income = ₹ 10,000
Growth Rate of Per Capita Income = \(\frac{2000}{10,000}\) × 100 = 20%
Thus Growth Rate of Per Capita Income = 20%.

Question 16.
What is meant by foreign aid? What are its main forms?
Answer:
In economics, the term ‘foreign aid’ is interpreted in a wider sense. By foreign aid, we mean foreign capital, foreign loans and foreign grants. In other words, the inflow of external assistance in the form of foreign capital, loans and grants by the foreign governments, private individuals, business organizations, foreign banks, international institutions, is termed as foreign aid.

Types of Foreign Aid-The main kinds of foreign aid are as follows :

  1. Foreign Capital
  2. Foreign Loans
  3. Foreign Grants.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 17.
Define balance of payments. What are the main items of the balance of payments?
Answer:
The account of receipts and payments of the government of one country from other countries during a period of one year is called balance of payments.

According to Kindleberger, “Balance of payments is a systematic record of all economic transactions between the residents of the reporting country and residents of foreign countries during a given period of time.”

Main Items of Balance of Payments. The main items of balance of payments can be divided into two categories :

  1. Items of current account. The main items of current account are :
    (a) The import and export of visible items like machinery, tea, tobacco, etc. The difference between such exports and imports is known as trade balance.
    (b) The import and export of invisible items like services of insurance companies, banks, doctors, engineers, government transactions, donations, tourism and shipping, etc.
  2. Items of capital account. The capital account is made up of such terms as the inward and outward flow of money for investment and international grants and loans.

Question 18.
Define monetary policy. What are its main methods?
Answer:
By monetary policy we mean a conscious action undertaken by the Central Bank of the country to change the quality, availability or cost (rate of interest) of money to achieve the various specified economic objectives.

Methods of Monetary Policy. The different methods of monetary policy, also known as instruments of credit control, are as follows :

  • Bank Rate
  • Open Market Operations
  • Changes in Minimum Cash Reserve Ratio
  • Change in Liquidity Ratio
  • Change in the Margin Requirements of Loan.

The govt, can control the problems of inflation and depression through making suitable changes in these instruments of monetary policy.

PSEB 10th Class Social Science Guide Basic Concepts Important Questions and Answers

Answer the following questions in one word or one line :

Question 1.
What are basic concepts?
Answer:
Those words which have special meaning in economics.

Question 2.
How can per capita income be measured?
Answer:
Per Capita Income = \(\frac{\text { National Income }}{\text { Population }}\)

Question 3.
What is capital formation?
Answer:
It is an addition to capital stock.

Question 4.
What is meant by inflation?
Answer:
Inflation means constant rise in prices.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 5.
What is meant by public debt?
Answer:
It means all types of loans taken by the government.

Question 6.
What is meant by poverty line?
Answer:
It is the method of measuring the poverty of any country.

Question 7.
Which policy is related to the government income and expenditure?
Answer:
Fiscal policy.

Question 8.
Define marginal propensity to consume.
Answer:
It is the ratio of change in consumption to change in income.

Question 9.
What is meant by average propensity to consume?
Answer:
It is the ratio of consumption to income.

Question 10.
What is marginal propensity to save?
Answer:
It is the ratio of change in savings to the change in income.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 11.
Define investment.
Answer:
An addition to capital is called Investment.

Question 12.
What is meant by induced investment,?
Answer:
Induced investment is that which depends upon the level of income and profit.

Question 13.
What is meant by autonomous investment?
Answer:
Autonomous investment is independent of the change in level of income and profit.

Question 14.
State any one component of money supply.
Answer:
Bank deposits.

Question 15.
How is growth rate determined?
Answer:
Growth rate of per capita income = \(\frac{\text { Change in Per Capita Income }}{\text { Initial Per Capita Income }}\) × 100

Question 16.
State any one determinant of investment.
Answer:
Rate of Interest.

Question 17.
What is the basic cause of inflation?
Answer:
Excess of demand over the supply.

Question 18.
What is balanced budget?
Answer:
When income is equal to expenditure.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 19.
What is deficit budget?
Answer:
When Expenditure of the government > Income of the government.

Question 20.
What is surplus budget?
Answer:
When Income of the government > Expenditure of the government.

Question 21.
Give one example of direct tax.
Answer:
Income Tax.

Question 22.
Give one example of indirect tax.
Answer:
Sales Tax.

Question 23.
Give one example of foreign aid.
Answer:
Foreign loans.

Question 24.
What is soft loan?
Answer:
It is a long term foreign loan with low rate of interest.

Question 25.
What is hard loan?
Answer:
It is a short term foreign loan with high rate of interest.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 26.
State any one objective of monetary policy.
Answer:
Price stability.

Question 27.
State any one objective of fiscal policy.
Answer:
Economic Development.

Question 28.
State any one instrument of fiscal policy.
Answer:
Taxation.

Question 29.
What is meant by domestic factor income?
Answer:
Domestic factor income is the sum of factor income within the domestic territory of a country.

Question 30.
What is meant by ‘normal resident of a country’?
Answer:
A normal resident of a country is defined as a person or institution who normally resides in a country and whose centre of interest lies in that country.

Question 31.
What is meant by ‘net factor income from abroad’?
Answer:
It is the difference between the income received by the residents of a country from abroad and the income paid for the factor services provided by the non-residents in the domestic territory of a country.

Question 32.
What is meant by factor income?
Answer:
Factor income is the income received by the different factors of production for their services in the production process.

Question 33.
What is ‘national income at current prices’?
Answer:
National income calculated by using the current year prices is called national income at current prices.

Question 34.
Define ‘national income at constant prices’.
Answer:
When national income is calculated by using base year prices, it is called national income at constant prices.

Question 35.
What is the relationship between national income at current prices and national income at constant prices?
Answer:
National income at constant prices = \(\frac{\text { National income at current prices }}{\text { Price Index }}\) × 100

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 36.
What is the ‘consumption function’ or ‘propensity to consume’?
Answer:
Consumption function signifies the functional relationship between income and consumption. In other words,
C = f(Y)
where C = Consumption and Y – Income.

Question 37.
What type of relationship exists between income and consumption?
Answer:
There is positive relationship between income and consumption.

Question 38.
What are the limits of mar ginal propensity to consume?
Answer:
Marginal propensity to consume lies in between zero and one.

Question 39.
Define saving.
Answer:
According to Keynes, “Saving is the excess of income over consumption.” In other words,
Saving = Income – Consumption.

Question 40.
Define average propensity to save.
Answer:
Average propensity to save is the ratio of saving to income. In other words,
A.P.S = \(\frac{\text { Saving }}{\text { Income }}\)

Question 41.
What is meant by net investment?
Answer:
Net Investment = Gross Investment – Depreciation.

Question 42.
What is meant by replacement investment?
Answer:
Replacement investment is that portion of gross investment that serves to replace the used up or worn out capital investment.

Question 43.
What is voluntary unemployment?
Answer:
A person is said to be voluntarily unemployed if he is not willing to work at the current wage rate.

Question 44.
What is meant by frictional unemployment?
Answer:
Unemployment resulting from the time lags involved in the redeployment of labour is known as frictional unemployment.

Question 45.
What is meant by seasonal unemployment?
Answer:
Seasonal unemployment is the unemployment due to the seasonal nature of activity in some industries.

Question 46.
What is meant by Price Index Number?
Answer:
Price index number signifies a single value with the help of which change is measured in the price/prices of a single commodity or a group of related commodities over a period of time.

Question 47.
What is the basic cause of inflation?
Answer:
When demand exceeds supply, prices start rising and hence inflation arises.

Question 48.
What are the main constituents of money supply?
Answer:
The main constituents of money supply are :

  • Currency which includes notes and coins
  • Demand deposits.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 49.
What is balanced budget?
Answer:
Balanced budget is that budget in which the income of the govt, equals its expenditure.

Question 50.
What is deficit budget?
Answer:
Deficit budget is that budget in which the expenditure of the govt, exceeds its income.

Question 51.
What is the surplus budget?
Answer:
A budget in which the income of the govt, exceeds its expenditure is known as surplus budget.

Question 52.
Give two examples each of direct and indirect taxes.
Answer:

  1. Direct Taxes: Income tax and Wealth tax.
  2. Indirect Taxes: Sales tax and Excise duty.

Question 53.
What is foreign collaboration?
Answer:
Foreign collaboration is one of the forms of foreign capital. Under foreign collaboration, joint ventures are set up by the foreign and the domestic entrepreneurs.

Question 54.
Give two examples of foreign aid.
Answer:

  1. Foreign loans and
  2. Foreign grants.

Question 55.
Distinguish between hard-loans and soft-loans.
Answer:
The long-term foreign loans with low rate of interest are called as soft-loans. On the other hand, the short-term foreign loans with’ high rate of interest are called as hard- loans.

Question 56.
What is meant by trade balance?
Answer:
Trade balance signifies the difference between the value of imports and exports of goods, that is, visible items only.

Question 57.
What is meant by unfavourable balance of payments?
Answer:
Unfavourable balance of payments means that the total value of imports of visible as well as invisible items is greater than the total value of exports of visible as well as invisible items.

Question 58.
What are the main objectives of monetary policy?
Answer:

  1. Price stability
  2. Full employment
  3. Economic development
  4. Exchange rate stability
  5. Reduction in economic inequalities.

Question 59.
What is meant by bank rate?
Answer:
Bank rate is that minimum rate at which the Central Bank lends money to other commercial banks.

Question 60.
What is meant by open market operations?
Answer:
The sale and purchase of securities in the open market by the Central Bank.

Question 61.
What is meant by liquidity ratio?
Answer:
Each bank has to keep a certain fixed proportion of its total deposits with itself. This ratio is called as liquidity ratio.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 62.
Name the main objectives of fiscal policy.
Answer:

  1. Economic development
  2. Price stability
  3. Exchange rate stability
  4. Full employment
  5. Economic equality.

Question 63.
What are the main instruments of fiscal policy?
Answer:

  1. Taxation
  2. Public debt
  3. Deficit financing
  4. Public expenditure.

Fill in the blanks :

Question 1.
_______ income may be defined as the factor income of the normal residents of a country in one year. (Per Capita / National)
Answer:
National

Question 2.
Use of goods and services produced in order to satisfy human wants is called as __________ (Consumption / Production)
Answer:
Consumption

Question 3.
An addition to ______ is called investment. (Consumption / Capital)
Answer:
Capital

Question 4.
_________ = \(\frac{\text { Consumption }}{\text { Income }}\) (MPC/APS)
Answer:
APC

Question 5.
__________ is defined as the ratio df change in savings to change in income. (MPC / MPS)
Answer:
MPS

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 6.
The policy of the government regarding income and expenditure is known as ___________ policy. (Fiscal / Monetary)
Answer:
Fiscal

Question 7.
Creation of utility is called ______________ (Consumption / Production)
Answer:
Production.

III. Multiple Choice Questions :

Question 1.
Destruction of utility is called
(a) Consumption
(b) Production
(c) Exchange
(d) Distribution.
Answer:
(a) Consumption

Question 2.
Give the formula to calculate Per Capita Income. National Income Population
(a) \(\frac{\text { National Income }}{\text { Per Capita Income }}\)
(b) \(\frac{\text { Population }}{\text { National Income }}\)
(c) \(\frac{\text { National Income }}{\text { Population }}\)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) \(\frac{\text { National Income }}{\text { Population }}\)

Question 3.
What is the other name of Per Capita Income?
(a) National
(b) Private
(c) Personal
(d) Average.
Answer:
(d) Average.

Question 4.
The policy of the government regarding income and expenditure is known as________policy.
(a) Monetary
(b) Government
(c) Planning
(d) Fiscal.
Answer:
(d) Fiscal.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 5.
Public Income has main aspects.
(a) Two
(b) Three
(c) Four
(d) Five.
Answer:
(b) Three

Question 6.
____________ is the ratio of consumption to income.
(a) APS
(b) APC
(c) MPS
(d) MPC.
Answer:
(b) APC

True / False :

Question 1.
Consumption = Income – Savings.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Expenditure for further production is known as savings.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
Income tax is direct tax.
Answer:
True

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 4.
The policy related with income and expenditure of the govt., is known as fiscal policy.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
Per capita income is also known as Average income..
Answer:
True.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Explain the concept of ‘domestic territory of country’.
Answer:
The domestic territory of the country does not necessarily mean the political limit but we include the following in it:

  1. The area and water which come within the national limit.
  2. Country’s embassies, military stations, consultancy offices in other countries.
  3. The airplanes and ships working in other countries.
  4. Fishing vessels, oil and natural gas rigs, and floating platforms operated by the residents of the country in the international waters.

Question 2.
Distinguish between gross national product and net national product.
Answer:
Gross National Product is the total market value of all the final goods and services produced in a nation in one year.
Net National Product means total of market value of net final goods and services produced in a nation in one year.
Net National Product = Gross National Product – Depreciation of Capital.

Question 3.
Explain the concepts of average propensity to consume and marginal propensity to consume with the help of examples.
Answer:
Average propensity to consume is the ratio of consumption to income. In other words,
A.P.C. = \(\frac{\text { Consumption }}{\text { Income }}\)

Example:

Income () Consumption () A.P.C
200 180 0.90
300 260 0.87

When income is 200, Consumption is 180, A.P.C. = \(\frac{180}{200}\) = 0.90. When income increases to ₹ 300, Consumption rises to ₹ 260.

In other words, A.P.C. = \(\frac{260}{300}\) = 0.87.

Marginal propensity to consume is the ratio of change in consumption of the change in income. In other words,
M.P.C = \(\frac{\text { Change in Consumption }}{\text { Change in Income }}\)

Examples:
PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts 1

Obviously, when income rises from ₹ 300 to ₹ 400, consumption increases from ₹ 230 to ₹ 280. Therefore, M.P.C. = \(\frac{40}{100}\) = 0.5. Similarly, when income rises from ₹ 400 to ₹ 500, Consumption rises from ₹ 280 to ₹ 320 and hence,

Question 4.
Distinguish between gross investment and net investment.
Answer:
Gross investment is the total production of capital goods in a year. This includes

  1. Net investment and
  2. Replacement investment. Replacement investment is that portion of gross investment that serves to replace the used up or worn out capital investment. It refers to the expenditure by the producers on account of depreciation of the fixed capital assets. Thus,

Gross Investment = Net Investment + Replacement Investment.
Net investment is the investment that results in an increase in capital stock. In other words, it is the investment over and above the replacement investment during a given period of time. Thus,
Net Investment = Gross Investment – Replacement Investment.

Question 5.
Distinguish between voluntary and involuntary unemployment.
Answer:
When a worker is not willing to work at the current wage rate, then he is said to be voluntarily unemployed. On the other hand, a worker is said to be involuntarily unemployed when he is willing to work at the current wage rate but does not get work.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 6.
In a state of full employment, what types of unemployment may exist?
Answer:
According to the classical economists, the following types of unemployment may exist even at the stage of full employment:

  • Voluntary unemployment
  • Frictional unemployment
  • Seasonal unemployment
  • Structural unemployment
  • Technical unemployment.

As a matter of fact, absence of involuntary unemployment signifies full employment in the economy.

Question 7.
Which are the constituents of money supply in India?
Answer:

  1. Currency, which includes within itself notes and coins.
  2. Bank deposits.

Question 8.
What is meant by government budget? What are the different types of budget?
Answer:
Govt, budget is a statement of its expected receipts and expected expenditure for the given financial year.
Govt, budget can be of three types:

  1. Deficit budget. Deficit budget is that budget in which the govt, expenditure exceeds its income. In case of deficit demand, deficit budget is thought to be suitable.
  2. Surplus budget. That budget in case of which the income of govt, exceeds its expenditure is called as surplus budget. This type of budget is suitable to control excess demand.
  3. Balanced budget. Balanced budget is that budget in case of which the income of the govt, equals its expenditure.

Question 9.
Give any two merits of direct taxes.
Answer:
(0 Direct taxes like income tax, wealth tax, etc. are based on the principle of ability to pay, so equity or justice in the allocation of tax burden is well secured by these taxes.
(ii) Direct taxes satisfy the canon of certainty.
The State as well as tax-payers are certain about the amount of tax.

Question 10.
Give any two merits of indirect taxes.
Answer:

  1. Since indirect taxes are collected in small amounts at intervals of time, they are more convenient and less pinching in effect. They are convenient from the point of view of the govt, also, since the tax amount is generally collected from manufacturers or the importers.
  2. Indirect taxes are generally difficult to be evaded as they are included in the price of the commodity. A person can evade an indirect tax only when he decides not to purchase the taxed commodity.

Question 11.
Discuss about the bank rate and open market operations as instruments of credit control.
Answer:
Bank Rate. The rate at which the central bank lends money to commercial banks is known as the bank rate. By changing the bank rate, the credit and thus the money supply can be affected. With an increase or decrease in the bank rate, the market rate of interest also increases or decreases. Thus with the increase in bank rate, credit becomes dearer and vice-versa. Obviously, when it becomes necessary to control the credit, then the bank rate is increased and when credit is to be expanded, the bank rate is decreased.

Open Market Operation. By open market operations, we mean the sale and purchase of securities in the open market by the Central Bank of the country. If the Central Bank of the country wants to control credit, then it will start selling the securities lying with it. And when it is necessary to expand the credit, then the Central Bank starts purchasing securities from the open market.

Question 12.
Discuss about minimum cash reserve ratio and liquidity ratio as instruments of credit control.
Answer:
Minimum Cash Reserve Ratio. The commercial banks have to keep some percent of their total reserves with the Central Bank in the form of reserve fund. The changes in cash reserve ratio affect the lending capacity of the commercial banks. If credit is to be controlled, then this ratio is increased and if credit is to be expanded, then this ratio is decreased.

Liquidity Ratio. The commercial banks have to keep- a certain fixed proportion of their total reserves with themselves in the form of cash. This is known as liquidity ratio. This amount cannot be lent by commercial banks. If the credit.is to be expanded then the Central Bank lowers this ratio. On the other hand, the liquidity ratio is increased if it becomes necessary to control the credit.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Explain common types of unemployment.
Answer:
Following are the common types of unemployment:
1. Voluntary Unemployment. Voluntary unemployment is a situation where workers are not willing to work on prevailing wage rates. In the words of Prof. Dillard, “Voluntary unemployment exists when potential workers are unwilling to accept the going wages or slightly less than going wages.”

2. Involuntary Unemployment. Involuntary unemployment is contrary to the voluntary unemployment. It is a situation in which the workers are ready to work at prevailing wage rates or even less than prevailing wage rates, but they do not get work. In this way involuntary unemployment is forced on the worker. According to Prof. J.M. Keynes, “Involuntary unemployment is a condition in which a person is willing to work at lower real wages than the current real wages whether or not he is willing to accept the lower money wages.”

3. Open Unemployment. In this type of unemployment labourers have not any work to do. He can get even less work. In the lack of work labourers completely remain unemployed. This type of unemployment exists in urban sectors like industrial unemployment and educated unemployment.

4. Seasonal Unemployment. Seasonal unemployment exists due to the seasonal nature of some occupations. For example, agricultural workers get work for few months in a year. Labourers in sugar mills get work from November to April and for other months they remain seasonal unemployed.

5. Structural Unemployment. Structural unemployment exists due to the change in the industrial structure. If we replace old machine for new machine, so during this replacement period worker remain unemployed. This type of unemployment is called structural unemployment.

6. Frictional Unemployment. Frictional unemployment comes into existence due to the mobility of the economy and imperfections in the labour market. In the words of Prof. Dillard, “Frictional unemployment exists when men are temporarily out of work because of imperfections in the labour market.”
Thus frictional unemployment exists in the economy due to immobility of labour in different industries, seasonal nature of some occupations, breakdown of the machinery and ignorance of job opportunities, etc.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions Economics Chapter 1 Basic Concepts

Question 2.
Explain the self-employment and wage generation approach of the government for poverty alleviation.
Answer:
Self-employment and Wage Generation Approach. This approach has been initiated from Third Five Year Plan (1961-66) and enlarged successfully since then.

The following programmes are initiated by the government from time to time under the approach:
1. Food for Work Programme. This programme was launched in the 19706 for the upliftment of the poor. Under this programme, foodgrains are distributed against the wage work.

2. Prime Minister’s Rozgar Yojana (PMRY). This programme has been implemented by the Khadi and Village Industries Commission, which aims at creating self-employment opportunities in rural areas and small towns. One can get financial assistance with bank loans to set up small enterprises under this programme. Under PMRY, the educated unemployed from low-income families in both rural and urban areas can get financial help to set up any type of industry which generates employment.

3. Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana (SJSRY): This program mainly aims at creating employment opportunities, both self-employment and wage employment in urban areas. Individuals were given financial assistance under the self-employment programme. Now, the PMRY and SJSRY in the 1990s have been changed. Those who wish to benefit from these programmes are encouraged to form Self Help Groups (SHGs) and then the government will provide partial financial assistance through banks.

4. Swarnajayanthi Gram Swarozgar Yojana. Sawamajayanthi Gram Swarbzgar Yojana was launched in April 1999 and is the only self-employment program currently being implemented. It aims at promoting micro-enterprises and to bring the assisted poor families (Swarozgaris) above the poverty line by organising them into Self-Help Groups through the process of social mobilisation, training and capacity building, and provision of income-generating assets through a mix of Bank Credit and Government subsidy. The scheme is being implemented on a cost-sharing ratio of 75: 25 between the centre and the states.

5. Sampoorna Grameen Rozgar Yojana (SGRY). The SGRY was launched in September 2001. The schemes of Jawahar Gram Samridhi Yojana and the Employment Assurance Scheme have been fully integrated with SGRY. The objective of the scheme is to provide additional wage employment along with food security, the creation of durable communities, social and economic assets, and infrastructure development in the rural areas. The scheme envisages the generation of 100 man-days of employment in a year. The cost of the program is to be shared between the centre and the states on a cost-sharing ratio of 87.5: 12.5 (including the foodgrains component).

Kho-Kho Game Rules – PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Book Solutions Kho-Kho Game Rules.

Kho-Kho Game Rules – PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Question 1.
Discuss the playground of the Kho-Kho Chasers, Runners, To take a direction, To Turn the face, Returning, Lona?
Answer:
Kho-Kho
The size of the Kho-Kho playground is rectangular. It is 29 metres long and 16 metres wide. There are two rectangles at the fend of the playground. One side of the rectangle is 15 m. and the other side is 2.75 m. In the middle of these rectangles, there are two wooden poles.

The central lane is 2.10 m. long and 30 cm. wide. There are eight small squares, 30 × 30 cms., on this lane. The height of each pole from the ground is 1.20 cms. A line is drawn towards the width of each pole. Eight lanes are drawn parallel to this line. Each lane is 15 m. in length and 30 cm. in width. This lane is divided into two equal parts, each of 7.10 m, by the central lane.kho-kho image 1

The thickness of each line is 2 cms. Each lane is 2.10 m. long Each outside lane and pole line are 2.25 metres from each other Each pole line is farther from outside boundary by 2.70 metres. There is a lobby 3 metre wide along the four sides of the playground.

Definitions

1. Posts:
Two posts are fixed at the end of the central lane. Thej are 1.20 cms. high above the ground. Their circumference cannot be less than 30 cms and not more than 40 cms.

2. Central Lane:
There is a central lane in between two poles. It is 21.60 m. long and 30 cm wide.

3. Cross Lane:
Each rectangle is 15 m. long and 30 cm. wide. It crosses the central lane at right angles (90°). It is itself divided into two halves. It is called cross-lane.

4. Square:
The area, 30 cm. × 30 cm., made by the intersection of the central lane and cross lane is called square.

5. The Line of the Post:
The line that goes to the centre of the post, parallel to cross lanes, is known as the line of the post.

6. Rectangle:
The area which is outside the line of post is known as rectangle.
kho-kho image 2

7. Limits:
The lines on both sides and at a distance gf 7.30 m. from the central line, and parallel to it, are called limits.

8. Chasers:
The players who sit in the squares are called chasers. A player who actively pursues the players of the rival team is termed an active chaser.

9. Runners:
The players of the opposite side other than those of chasers are called runners.

10. To give Kho:
In order to give good Kho, an active chaser should touch the sitting chaser from behind, uttering clearly and loudly the word “Kho”. The action of touching and uttering of the word “Who” should be done simultaneously.

11. Foul:
If a sitting or active chaser breaks any rule, that is called a foul.

12. To take a Direction:
The taking of direction is to go from one post to another post.

13. To turn the Face:
At a time when an active chaser, going in a particular direction, turns his or her shoulders at 90°, he or she is said to have turned the face. It is a foul.

14. Returning:
When the active chaser, going in a particular direction, changes his direction to the opposite, he or she is said to have returned or receded. This is also a foul.

15. To Leave the Post Line:
When an active chaser leaves hold of a post, and leaves the rectangle or goes beyond it, such actions are known as leaving the post line.

16. Foot Out:
When a runner’s feet touch the ground outside the limits, it is called Foot-out, and the runner is out.

17. Lona:
When all runners are out within 7 minutes, the chaser will mark “Lona” against the runners. But no point is awarded for “Lona.”

How to begin the Play:
The game of Kho-Kho is started with a toss. The toss winning captain of the team shall decide to touch or be touched, and inform the referee about his decision. The players who sit are called chasers. The opposing players of the chasers are known as runners. Except one chaser, all the chasers sit in such a way that no two adjacent chasers face the same side. At the start of the game, the ninth chaser stands near a pole. When the referee whistles, the action of touching begins.

Kho-Kho Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Question 2.
Discuss the rules in the Kho-Kho game?
Answer:
Rules Of The Play

  1. No part of an active chaser’s body should touch the ground of the central lane. Moreover, he cannot cross the central lane by jumping from within the posts.
  2. The playfield shall be marked as shown in the diagram.
  3. The decision to be a chaser or a runner is made by toss.
  4. If a Kho is to be given, it shall have to be given from behind to a sitting chaser. Without having received the Kho, the chaser cannot get up. The active chaser shall not give Kho by touching the extended arm or leg of the sitting chaser. If the chaser breaks Rule no. 1 and 2, the referee shall award a foul.
  5. After having played, the active chaser takes the plac§ of the sitting chaser whom he has given the ‘Kho’.
  6. After taking the Kho the running chaser shall go in the direction which goes to the central lane.
  7. Until the utters ‘Kho’ to any sitting chaser, he can come only by crossing through the opposite side of the central lane above the pole.
  8. The face of the runner should be towards the direction of running.
  9. The chaser should sit in such a way that he does not obstruct the runners. If a runner is out because of any such obstruction, he shall be declared out.
  10. The active chaser can’ come out of the limit. But he will have to follow the rules regarding taking direction and turning the face, etc.
  11. After having taken the direction, the active chaser can attack again in the cross line, and it shall not be considered a foul.
  12. The runner cannot touch a sitting chaser. If he does so, he is given warning once. If he does so even after the warning, he is declared out.
  13. If the runner goes out of court, he shall be deemed to be out.
  14. If the runner is touched by a chaser, he shall be considered out.
  15. The rules regarding taking direction and changing direction shall not be applicable in the rectangular area.

Question 3.
Discuss the rules of the match in the Kho-Kho game?
Answer:
Rules About the Match

1. Each team shall have 9 members with 3 extras.

2. Each innings shall Mve four running and chasing turns which shall be of 7-7 minute duration. The two innings are for touching, and two for running.

3. Before the start of the match the captains of both teams shall decide about the turn of chasers or runners by toss.

4. Runners, in order of playing, shall get their names recorded with the scorer. At the beginning of a turn, the first three players shall be within the limit. When these three players are out, the next three shall succeed them before the kho is given. The players who fail to enter within that period shall be out. The players who enter out of turn shall also be declared out. This process will continue until the end of the term. The active chaser who has removed the third runner shall not pursue the newly entered runner. He will give Kho. The runners of each team shall enter the field from one side only.

5. The chaser and the runner have the option to end the turn before the given time. The captain of the runner or chaser team shall inform about his decision to the referee, and shall request the referee to declare the turn close. On such a request, the referee shall stop the game to end the turn. There shall be a rest of two minutes after this turn, and of five minutes in between two innings.

6. The chaser, on each runner’s being out, shall score one point. A ‘Lona’ is scored against all the runners who are out before time. Afterwards, that team sends its runners in the same turn. No extra point is given for scoring a Lona. The play shall continue in the same way until the close of the innings. The order of runners during the innings can be changed.

7. The team that scores more points at the end of a match in knock-out system is declared the winner. If the points are equal, one more innings is played. If again the points are equal, the Baker Rule 29 is used. In this condition, the players need not be the same.

In the league system, the winning team scores two points and the losing one scores zero point, and in case of a tie, each team is awarded one point. If in a league system, the league points are equal, the team or teams shall replay the game by lots. Such matches shall be played on knock-out system.

8. If due to any reason match is not completed, it shall be played at some other time, and the previous score shall not be counted. The match shall be replayed from the beginning.

9. If the points of a team are more than the points of the opposing team by 12 or more, the first team can ask the other team to follow on their innings as chasers. If the other team scores more points, it retains its right to be chasers.

10. If a player gets hurt during the play, he can be replaced by a substitute on the referee’s permission.

Kho-Kho Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Question 4.
Mention the number of officials conducting the game of Kho-Kho?
Answer:
Officials:
The following officials are appointed to conduct the match:

  1. Two Umpires
  2. One Referee
  3. One Time Keeper
  4. One Scorer

1. Umpire:
The umpire shall stand outside the lobby ground and shall supervise the match from the central lane. He shall give all decisions of his half, and shall help the other umpire to make correct decisions in the other half.

2. Referee:
There is only one referee in the game of Kho-Kho. His duties as referee are as follows:

  1. He shall help the umpire perform their duties. He shall give his own decision in case there is any difference between the umpires on an issue.
  2. A referee shall punish the defaulting player for his misbehaviour or for breaking the rules of the game.
  3. He is responsible for proper conduct of the game and match.
  4. At the end of innings he declares the score won by each team, and announces the result.

3. Time Keeper:
The duty of the time keeper is to record time. He signals the start and the end of the innings by blowing a whistle.

4. Scorer:
The scorer makes it certain that the players enter the field in accordance with the approved order. He keeps a record of the runners who are out. At the end of each term, he enters makes on the score sheet and prepares the score of the chasers. At the end of the match, he prepares the result and hands over the same to the referee for announcement.

Question 5.
Write down the score sheet of Kho-Kho game.
Answer:
kho-kho image 3

Kho-Kho Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Important Information About the Kho-Kho Game

  • The length and breadth of ground for man = 29 × 16 m
  • The number of square in central line = 8
  • Size of the lobby = 16 × 2.75 meter
  • Distance of square from each line = 2.50 meter
  • Breadth and length of central line = 30 c.m. & 23.50 meter
  • Size of square = 30 × 30 c.m.
  • Number of players in a team = 9 players
  • Substitution of players = 3 players
  • Duration of the Kho-Kho match = 9-5-9 (9) 9-5-9 minutes
  • Inning of Kho-Kho match = 2
  • Sitting players in square are called = Chaser
  • Opponent of chaser = Runner
  • Duration of play for girls = 7-2-7 (5) 7-2-7 minutes
  • Official of the match = One referee, Two Umpire, One time keeper, One scorer
  • Height of the pole = 1.20 meter
  • The size of the Kho-Kho playground is rectangular. It is 29 metre long and 16 metre wide.
  • A Kho-Kho team includes 12 players, of which 9 players play and 3 players are substitutes.
  • The start of the game is by toss. The captain of the toss winning team decides to be a chaser or runner.
  • Except one chaser, all chasers sit on the squares in such a way that there are no two adjacent chasers facing the same side.
  • Kho should be given from behind to a sitting chaser.
  • Kho-Kho match consists of 2-2 innings. The team that scores more points in all the innings is declared the winner.
  • A player who gets injured or hurt during the play may be substituted by another player with the permission of the referee.
  • No part of an active chaser’s body should touch the central lane.
  • If the two teams score equal points, one more innings shall be played. If again the scores are equal, another innings is played.
  • A substitute comes in place of an injured player.
  • The duration of the game is 9-5-9, 7,9-5-9 minutes.

Basketball Game Rules – PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Physical Education Book Solutions Basketball Game Rules.

Basketball Game Rules – PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Question 1.
Describe the game of Basketball, its court and Restricted Area?
Answer:
The game of basketball is played between two teams. Each team consists of 5 players. The number of substitutes is 5-7. Each team aims at throwing the ball into the basket of the opposing team, and the opposing team tries to prevent the other team from securing the goal. The basketball court is 28 metres long and 15 metres broad. Its length and breadth can be decreased by 2 and 5 metres respectively in proportion to the two sides.

The height of the hall is 7 metres, and the light should be uniform. Its floor should be wooden or cemented: It can be made of synthetic rubber. For the competition of FIBA (International Amateur Basketball Federation) the court should be of specified dimensions. The boundary lines of the basketball court shall be marked at every point at least 2 metres away from any obstruction. The breadth of lines shall be 5 cms.

Board:
Backboards should be made of hard wood or of fibre glass. Each board should be 2 cm. thick. A rectangle behind the ring above the board of the dimension of 59 cms. horizontal and 45 cms. vertical is made with 5 cm. broad lines. The boundary of the board is also marked with 5 cm. broad lines. The lower edge of the board from the ground is 2.75 metre high.
Basketball image 1
Basket:
The basket is made of white net with iron rings. The length of the net is 40 cm. and the radius of the ring is 45 cms. while its thickness is 20 mm.

Centre Line:
A centre line, parallel to the end lines, shall be marked. It shall divide the court into Front Court and Back Court. This line shall be 15 cm. outside on both sides.

Centre Circle:
A circle with a radius of 1.80 m. shall be marked exactly in the centre of the court. It shall be measured from the outer line of the circle.

Three Points Field Goal Area:
The three points field goal area is marked by two arcs, which is from a radius of 6.25 metres to the outer edges of the centre of the side line. It is directly perpendicular to the centre of the basket. The end lines are parallel to the side lines. The distance between the end line and the lines of the three point field goal area is 1.25 m. The centre point is 1.575 metre from the inside edge of the mid point of the end line. The arc is only upto semi-circle and is thereafter parallel to the side line.

Restricted Area, Free Throw Lines:
Parallel to each end line, a free throw line with its further edge at a distance of 5.80 m. shall be drawn. It shall be 3.60 m. long and its mid-point shall be on the line joining the mid points of the two ends.Basketball image 2
The restricted area is formed by the lines from end lines and free-throw lines. Its radius is marked by end lines and free-throw lines. The outer edge of these lines shall be 3 metres from the mid-points of end-lines and finish at the ends of the free throw lines. This line is in the semi-circle with a r idius of 1.80 m. in the court.

The first line is 1.75 m. from the inside edge of the end line. The first lane place shall be limited by a line 85 cm away. Next to it will be neutral zone 30 cm in width. The second lane place shall be 85 cm in width and is close to the neutral zone. The third lane place will be adjacent to the second lane place and shall be 85 cm in width. Each marked portion in the broken semi-circle shall be 35 cm. in length and the gap between two portions shall be 40 cm.

Basketball Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Backboard Size, Material and Position:
Backboards should be made of hard wood or of fibre glass. Each backboard is 3 cm. in thickness. It is 1.80 metre horizontally and 1.20 metre vertically. A 59 × 45 cm. rectangle is made behind the ring on the board. The width of its lines is 5 cm. The upper edge of this line is parallel to the level of the ring. The board is limited by 5 cm. thick lines. The lower edge of the board is 2.75 metre high from the ground. The uprights that support the backboards“shall be at a distance of 1 m. from the outer-edges of the end-lines in the restricted area.
Basketball image 3
BASKET:
The basket is made of rings and net. It is 40 cm. in length. It is fixed with an iron ring. The rings are 45 cm. in inside diameters. The radius of this orange painted basket is 45 cm. The metal of rings is 20 mm. thick. A net made of white cord suspends from the rings. The rings are made in such a way that when the ball passes through it, they check it momentarily. The length of the net should be 40 cm.

Ball:
The ball is spherical. It is made of leather and has in it a rubber bladder. Its circumference is from 75 to 78 cm. Its weight is from 600 to 650 gms. The rules also now permit the use of used ball. The referee may choose a used ball. The ball should have been so much inflated that when it falls on the ground from a height of 1.80 m. it does not bounce from its upper edge, by not less than 1.20 m. and not more than 1.40 m.

A ball, once selected, cannot be used by any player before the match. A new ball may be used in case a suitable used ball is not available.
Basketball image 4

Basketball Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Question 2.
What type of technical equipment is used in the game of Basketball?
Answer:
Technical Equipment

(a) (i) Game Watch
(ii) Time-out Watch

(b) Score-sheet

(c) Marks numbered from 1 to 5 having a minimum size of 20 cm × 10 cm. Marks from 1-4 shall be black while mark 5 is red.

(d) An efficient instrument visible to players and spectators to implement the 30 second rule.

(e) A Score Board, visible to all, having game points (scores) of both the teams written on it.

(f) Scorers shall have two red flags as foul markers of both the teams. The flag will be brought to the side of the team in case of eight fouls during a certain period and will be visible to the players, coach and game officials.

Question 3.
What is the number of officials conducting the game of Basketball?
Answer:
Officials and their Assistants and their Duties

(i) Referee’s Duties:

  1. It is the referee’s duty to look after the whole equipment and to give advice to the players through signs
  2. To perform other functions according to rales.
  3. To make the scorer fill up the record sheet.
  4. To toss in the middle of the game
  5. To conduct the whole game under his care. He gives proper decisions to both the teams. His decisions are adhered to by all the players
  6. He also adjudicates in case of misunderstanding among players, and conducts the game according to rales
  7. If a player plays wrongly, he awards him penalty (8) He signs the score sheet at the end of the play and awards victory or defeat.
    Basketball image 5

Time-Keeper:

(1) His function is to have control over time during the play. Before the start of the game he informs the referee that the game is to begin within three minutes so that he may inform the teams. After the interval he also reminds the referee that two minutes have left in the beginning of the game.

(2) He keeps the whole record from the start to the end of the game. He has to remember as to how long the game could not be played. When the time keeper rings the bell, the referee also blows his whistle to declare that time is over.

Scorer:

  1. His duty is to note the scores made by a player in the score sheet.
  2. He writes down the names of the all the players on the score sheet before the start of the game.
  3. The scorer should know as to how many scores have been made by an individual player.
  4. He adds each score made by a player very carefully to his account.
  5. He should note all the fouls done by a player on the side of his fouls. When a player makes five fouls, he informs the referee about it so that the player may be expelled from the game.
  6. After the end of the play, scorer gets the signature of the referee on the score sheet. Two scores are made if the ball falls from above in the basket. One score is made in case of a free throw.

Player Leaving Court:

No player can leave the court until the interval or until the rules permit without the permission of the game officials.

Captain:

Only the captain can talk to the officials for seeking any information or interpretation of any sort. The right to substitute a player lies with the coach or the captain acting as a coach.

Duration of Play:

The game is played in the four durations of 20 minutes each. There is an interval of 10 minutes for rest between the four durations.

Start of Play:

The referee starts the game. He shall toss the ball for a centre jump between two opponent players in centre circle. The game shall not start until five players of each team have entered the ground. If within five minutes after the starting time, a team does not enter the playground, the opposing team shall get walk over, that is, it is declared winner without playing.

Basketball Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Question 4.
What is the Jump ball in Basketball, what type of fouls can occur during Jump ball?
Answer:
Jump Ball. At the time of jump ball the two jumpers shall stand with their feet inside the half of the circle beside their respective basket, and one of their feet shall be beyond the centre of the line that is between them. An official shall toss the ball upward in such a way that no player can reach it by jumping and the ball drops between them.

No player shall tap the ball before it reaches its full height. A jumping player can tap the ball only twice. The moment the violation during the jump ball is made, it is penalised with a throw in at the side line. It is mid point for the opponents.

Goal:
A goal is scored when the ball enters the basket from above and is held there or passes through it. Two points are counted when a goal from the field is attempted from within the 3 point line, and one point when a goal is attempted from free throw. A field goal attempted from beyond the 3-point line would count 3 points.

Obstacle during Attack:
When the ball goes downward flight above the basket, no player shall touch or catch it even if an attempt is being made for goal.

Obstacle during Defence:
When an opponent tries for a goal by tossing the ball and the ball is above the level of the basket area and begins its downward flight, then no defender shall try to touch it. In case of violation, the ball shall become dead. If the violation occurs at the time of free throw, the thrower is awarded one point, and if it occurs at the time of attempting a goal, the thrower is awarded two points.

Ball in the Play after the Goal:
Five seconds after a goal has been secured, any player of the opposing team shall put the ball in play from any point out of bounce at the end of the court.

Decision of Play:
A team scoring greater number of points is declared the winner.

Forfeit of Play:
If any team does not enter the playfield after the interval or when the time is due on the call of the referee, the ball shall be brought in the ground and the absent team shall forfeit the game. If during the play the number of players of a‘team comes down to 2, the game shall come to end and that team forfeits the game.

Score and Extra Time:
In case the score is a tie at the end of the second half, five minutes more and such time more will be given till the decision of the game is given. In an extra period, there shall be tos? to select the basket, and thereafter in every extra period the basket shall be changed.

Time-out:
Each team can get two times-out until interval and one time out in one extra period. A time-out of one minute is given in case a player receives an injury. If during this time the injured player does not get well, a substitute is taken.

Basketball Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Question 5.
Describe five second, Eight second, three second and twenty four second rules?
Answer:
Five second Rule:
If a closely-guarded player blocks the ball from play and does not attempt to throw the ball in the game within five seconds, it is called blocking.

Eight second Rule:
When a team receives the ball in its back court, it has to send the ball into its front court within ten seconds.

Twenty four second Rule:
As per new rule, a new 24 second period does not begin following a throw in from out of line bounds at the side line until:

(a) The ball has gone out of bounds and throw-in is taken by a player from the same team.
(b) The officials have suspended the play to protect an injured player and the throw-in is taken by a player from the team to which the injured player belongs. After 30 seconds the operator will re-start the device from the time it was stopped when team control is again established by the same team after the thrown-in has been made.

Termination of Play:
On receiving the signal of the termination of play by the time keeper, the game shall be terminated.

Substitution of Player:
A substitute player before entering the court shall report to the scorer and shall be ready to play the game immediately. As soon as he gets the signal he shall reach the court. He should not take more than twenty seconds in reaching the court. If he takes more time, it shall be deemed as time-out, and it shall be charged against the opposing team.

Dead Ball:
The ball is dead when the ball, already in flight, on a shot for a goal, is touched by any player after time has expired for half or extra period or after a foul has.been called.

Three-second Rule:
When the ball is in the control of a team, no player of that team can remain for more than three seconds in the opponent court.

Dribbling:
Dribbling holds an important place in basketball. A player learns half of the game when a player has learnt to have full control over the ball and to dribble the ball. When a player continues to toss the ball into the air, fall it on the ground, and then re-takes it, it is called dribbling. When a player after having taken the ball places his foot on the floor in such a way that he appears to be rotating on a point, it is called pivot foot.

Ball in Play after Foul:
When a ball goes out of play by a foul, this dead ball shall be taken in play by

  • a throw-in from out-of-bounds, or
  • by a jump-ball at one of the circles, or
  • by one or more free throws.

Throw-in:
A ball shall be known to be dead in case of violation of rules, and the opposite team is awarded a throw-in from a close point on side line. The rule now permits a player who is to make the throw-in to touch the end line, and it is no longer a violation now.

Free throw:
A player on whom the foul is made takes a free throw. But in a technical foul any player can take a free throw. When a free throw is attempted, the positions of other players shall be as follows:

  1. Two players of the opposing team shall stand near the basket.
  2. Other players shall take alternate positions.
  3. Other players can take any position provided they do not disturb a free-throw.

Violation of Free-throw Rules:
After the ball has been given to a player for a free throw:

(a) He must throw the ball within five seconds and in such a way that it enters the basket or touches the ring
(b) While the ball is on its way to the basket or is on or within the basket, no player shall touch it.
(c) The thrower shall not touch the floor or across the free throw line. No. player of either team shall touch the free-throw line or create an obstacle for the player taking free throw.

Game to be Forfeited. As per the new rule it is no more necessary for the referee to put the ball in play in a manner as if both the teams were on the floor ready to play and forfeit the game. Now, if after the call for play by the referee a team refuses to play, the team shall forfeit the game.

Ball Return to Back Court. As per the new rule, the ball is sent into team ‘A’s back court provided it is touched by a player of the team A only when team ‘A’ has control of the ball in front court. Accordingly, a touch by player of the team ‘A’, while the ball is in control of the team B in the team A’s front court, if made to go into the team A’s back court, is not considered as caused to go into back court.

Further, during a throw-in from mid-point, the official makes it certain that the player takes his position by having his one foot on either side of the extended centre line.

Violation on Out of Bounds Play:
It is not considered to be a violation when a player, who has been awarded a throw-in, steps on the line while releasing the ball.

Penalty:
(i) If the infringement is made by the free-thrower, no point shall be recorded. The ball shall be given out of bounds on the side line to the opponent.

(ii) In case there is an infringement by a team-mate of the free thrower, the point shall be recorded. If the violation is done by both the teams, no point shall be recorded and the play will be restarted with a jumping ball on the free-throw line.

(iii) In case of the violation of rule (c) by a team-mate of the free thrower and the free-throw is successful, the goal shall be counted ignoring the violation. In case the free-throw is not successful, it shall be penalised.

(iv) In case of the violation of rule (c) by the free thrower’s opponents and the success of the free throw, a goal shall be counted ignoring the violation.

(v) If the rule (c) is violated by both the teams and the free-throw succeeds, the goal shall be counted ignoring the violation. If the free-throw does not succeed, the play shall be resumed by a jump ball on the free- throw line.

Basketball Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Question 6.
How many types of fouls are there in the game of Basketball?
Answer:
Technical Foul by Player. No player shall ignore the warning given by the official, and behave in a manner which does not behove a good player, for example:

  1. Addressing an official in a disrespectful manner, or meeting him.
  2. To misbehave,
  3. Troubling an opponent or obstructing his vision by waving the hand before his eyes.
  4. Obstructing or delaying the game in an improper way.
  5. Not raising the arm properly on the signal of a foul.
  6. Changing his playing number without reporting to the scorer or referee.
  7. Sending the substitute in the court without reporting to the scorer.

Penalty:
Every offence shall be considered a foul and the opponents shall be awarded two free throws for one foul. For repeated offence of this rule, the player shall be disqualified and expelled from the game.

Technical Foul by Coach or Substitute Player:
No coach or a substitute player can enter the court without the permission of the official. He can neither leave his place to follow the action in the court nor address an opponent disrespectfully.

Penalty:
On the violation of this rule by the coach, a four shall be recorded against him. For each offence a free-throw shall be awarded and the ball shall be given to the same team for throw-in on the central line. On the repeated violation of this rule, the coach can be removed from the vicinity of the court.

Personal Foul:
The person who makes a personal foul blocks, attacks, catches or pushes an opponent carrying the ball normally. At such a moment the referee blows his whistle and awards penalty.

Penalty:
If a foul is committed on a player who is in the act of shooting, then

(i) if a goal is scored, it shall be counted, and one free-throw shall be awarded, (ii) if the shot for goal (2 points) does not succeed, two free- throws shall be awarded, and (iii) if the shot for goal (3 point attempt) remains unsuccessful, three free-throws shall be awarded.

Intentional Foul:
It is that personal foul which a player commits intentionally. A player who commits this foul time and again is disqualified and expelled from the play.

Penalty:
An offender shall be charged of personal foul, and two free-throws shall be awarded. If this foul is committed by a player who scores a goal, the goal shall be counted, and an extra free-throw shall be awarded.

Double Foul:
A double foul is committed in such a situation in which two opposing players strike against each other, and both of them are at fault. This foul is recorded against both the players. In case of this foul, the play is resumed from the near circle by a jump ball.

Multiple Foul:
A multiple foul is committed when two or more players of a team commit a personal foul on one opposing player. In case of such a situation, a foul shall be recorded against each offending player, and the player against whom it is committed shall be awarded a free-throw. If the foul has been committed against a player during the act of shooting, the goal, if made, shall be counted and one free-throw shall be awarded.

Five Fouls:
If a player commits five fouls, either personal or technical, he shall be turned out.

Three for two Rule:
When a player is about to score a goal and an opponent commits a foul, if the goal is scored, one more free-throw shall be given. In case no jfoal is scored and if neither of the two free-throw succeeds, an additional free-throw shall be awarded.

Right of Option:
The right of option for a throw-in from mid-point is applicable in respect of one and two throws and three free-throws. Before the option is made, the captain is permitted to have a Brief consultation with the coach.

Four Fouls by a Team:
After a team has committed four player fouls (personal or technical) in a half all subsequent players shall be penalised by two free throws. If a player’s foul includes two or three free-throws.

Jump Ball:
The game is played with jump-ball at the start of the game, after the interval or when double or multiple foul is committed. The referee tosses the ball between the opposing players inside the centre circle. Both the players try to catch the ball by jumping. The game starts with the touch of a player on the ball.

Fouls during Jump Ball:
During jump ball the player commits following types of fouls:

  1. Jumping at each other.
  2. Touching the line.
  3. Touching the ball in flight after it has been tossed by the referee.
  4. Elbowing or pushing the opponent during jumping in order to block the opponent’s jump.
  5. Blocking the opponent’s jump by placing one’s foot on the opponent’s foot during the process of jumping.
  6. Touching the lines of the radius during jumping.
  7. Moving of the players from one place to the other while jumping.

Basketball Game Rules - PSEB 10th Class Physical Education

Question 7.
Describe the important passes in basketball?
Answer:
Important Passes In Basketball

1. Two Hands Chest Pass:
The pass is made quickly by placing the ball in front of the chest with both the hands. This pass is made when the player faces no opponent. It is given to the team mates by holding the ball in both the hands, raising shoulders and arms, bending the body a little and by pressing one foot forcibly. This is a normal practice in the game.

2. Side Arm Pass:
This pass is given to the team-mates by either extending or raising the arm. This way is put into practice when a player wants to give pass to his playmate who is away. This pass can be given when an obstruction occurs during the process of dribbling. Then a player gives pass to another by extending his arm. Some teams are very well- versed in putting the ball jnto the ring from the centre.

3. Over-head Pass:
This pass is given to the team-mates by raising both the arms. It is considered to be proper when a player is surrounded by many opponents. The player makes the pass by crossing the ball over many heads raising his arm. The opponents have to make very bard efforts to block such a ball given through this type of pass.

4. Ground Pass:
This pass is given when the opposing player is tall, and the ball cannot be crossed over his head. At that time, the pass is given by throwing the ball on the ground.

5. Back Pass:
This pass is given from Back Side. The player moves to by tossing the ball on the hands, and in case there is an obstruction on the way, he gives back pass to his team mate standing behind.

Important Information About the Basketball Game

  • The length and breadth of court = 28 × 15 m
  • Number of players in one team = 12, five players, seven substitutes.
  • Radius of central circle = 1.80 meter
  • Breadth of lines = 5 c.m.
  • Thickness of the board = 3 c.m. c
  • Height of the board from floor = 2.90 meter
  • Dimension of board = 180 × 120 c.m.
  • Circumference of the ball = 75 to 78 c.m.
  • Weight of the ball = 600 to 650 gm
  • Rectangle size of the board = 49 × 45 c.m.
  • Distance of each pole = 2 meter
  • Duration of the game = 10-2-10 (10) 10-2-10 from half
  • Officials of the match = One table commissioner, One referee, One Umpire, One chief Refree, One time keeper, One scorer and 24 second operator.
  • A match of basketball is played between two teams. Each team has 5 players, and 5 or 7 substitutes.
  • The basketball court is rectangular. It is 28 metres long and 15 metres broad. The court must be made of wood or cement.
  • Each member of the team shall be numbered from 4 to 15 on the front and back of his vest or shirt. The front numbers should be 6″ long and the back numbers 15″.
  • The game has four durations of 10-2-10-10, 10-2-10. Until the interval which is of 10 minutes, no player can leave the court without the permission of the concerned official.
  • During the play players can be substituted any number of times but their names must appear on the score sheet, and the substitution of player can take place at the throw or watch of the substituted team or at dead ball.
  • Two or three free throws are awarded, as per the situation, after a foul which follows 4 fouls in one half of a team.
  • A player is expelled from the match after he has done five fouls.
  • The weight of the basketball is from 600 to 650 gms. and its circumference is from 75 to 78 cms.
  • During the play of a game, a coach can secure a time out (which is of 1 minute) two times for rest.
  • The radius of the centre circle of the basketball court is 1.80 m, the thickness of the board is 3 cm, the height of the lower edge of blackboard from the ground is 2.75 m, the height of the ring is 3.05 m and the length of the white net is 40 cms. The breadth of all boundary lines is 5 cms.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class Social Science Book Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 10 Social Science History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

SST Guide for Class 10 PSEB Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji Textbook Questions and Answers

Answer the following questions in 10-15 words:

Question 1.
Name the Guru whowas earlier known as Bhai Lehna Ji.
Answer:
Bhai Lehna Ji was the earlier name of Guru Angad Dey Ji.

Question 2.
Define Lagar System.
Answer:
The Langar system or Pa1lgat refers to that tradition by which all the people without any distinction, like caste, religion, etc. sat in one row and partook food. Guru Amar Das Ji had made a rule according to which no body would come in his presence without first partaking food in the Pangat.

Question 3.
Name the Guru who laid the foundation of Baoli at Goindwal Sahib.
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji laid the foundation of a large well (Baoli) in GoindwaL

Question 4.
Name the Guru whom Akbar visited.
Answer:
Akbar met Guru Amar Das Ji at Goindwal.

Question 5.
Write two objectives of the Masand System.
Answer:
The two aims of Masand System were as follows:

  1. To collect the donations for the development work relating to Sikh religion.
  2. To organise the Sikhs.

Question 6.
Who was the fourth Guru of the Sikhs? Vhich city was founded by him?
Answer:
Guru Ram Das Ji was the fourth Guru of the Sikhs and Guru Sahib built the city of Ramdaspur (Amritsar).

Question 7.
When and who laid the foundation of Sri Harimandir Sahib?
Answer:
The foundation stone of Sri Harimandir Sahib was laid in 1589 A.D. by the renowned Sufi Saint of his times, Miari Mir.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 8.
What is the significance of four doors on the four sides of Sri Harimandir Sahib?
Answer:
The significance of erecting the doors in all the four directions in Sri Harimandir Sahib is to indicate that Sri Harimandir Sahib is open to all classes, all the religions and all the castes without any discrimination.

Question 9.
Name the four cities established by Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji founded the following four cities:

  1. Tarn Taran,
  2. Kartarpur,
  3. Hargobiridpur and
  4. Chheharta.

Question 10.
Define the meaning of ‘Daswandh’.
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji made many rules for Masand System. The most important rule was about ‘Daswandh’. According to it, the devotees were required to donate tenth part of their income to the Guru for religious activites. It was called Daswandh.

Question 11.
Why was the Adi Granth Sahib compiled?
Answer:
The Adi Granth Sahib was compiled to provide a collection of authentic Bani (hymns) of Guru Sahiban for the proper guidance of the Sikhs. Guru Arjan Dev Ji wanted to provide a true religions book to ensure that Sikhs could receive the true knowledge of Guru Bani and might not be cheated by the false writings written in the name of Guru Sahibs.

Question 12.
What do you know about Langar System?
Answer:
The Langar System or Pangat was started bydGuru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Angad Dev Ji continued the system With full devotion. This system proved to be a powerful agency for popularising the Sikh religion.

Question 13.
What was preached by Guru Angad Dev Ji to the Sikhs through the Sangat System?
Answer:
Guru Angad Dev Ji gave the message of peace and brotherhood and dealt a severe blow to the caste system among the Sikhs.

Question 14.
What was the contribution of Guru Angad Dev Ji towards Langar system?
Answer:
Guru Angad Dev Ji further promoted the Langar system or Pangat, which was established by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. This system worked with the voluntary support of his Sikh followers. Bibi Khiwi, wife of Guru Angad Dev Ji, managed the Pangat System with full devotion.

Question 15.
Write about the wrestling ground established by Guru Angad Dev Ji.
Answer:
Guru Angad. Dev Ji believed that the physical fitness was essential for the intellectual development of the Sikhs. Hence, in order to develop physical health of his Sikh followers, Guru Sahib established a gymnasium at Khadoor Sahib. Guru Sahib organised there wrestling matches regularly.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 16.
What do you know about Goindwal Sahib?
Answer:
The city of Goindwal is situated on the bank of river Beas. Guru Amar Das Ji constructed here a Baoli, a large oblong tank of water. This Baoli has eighty four steps with landing places. Guru Sahib had decreed that whoever would reverently repeat the Japuji Sahib on every step shall escape from wandering in the wombs of the eighty four lakhs of living .creatures. In the course of time, Goindwal became an important centre of Sikh pilgrimage.

Question 17.
Write the views of Guru Amar Das Ji about Caste System.
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji was strongly against untouchability and discriminations based on Caste System (Jati System). Guru Sahib considered those people foolish and ignorant who believed in Jati System and untouchability. Guru Sahib had instructed the Sikhs to condemn untouchability and Caste System.

Question 18.
What were the views of Guru Amar Das Ji about the Sati System?
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji strongly criticised the practice of Sati. Guru Sahib told that a widow who had burnt herself alive on the pyre of her dead husband could not be called a true Sati. According to him, a widow who preferred to live her life in the memory of her dead husband could be called a true Sati.

Question 19.
What reforms did Guru Amar Das Ji introduce for marriage, birth and death ceremonies?
Answer:

  1. Guru Amar Das Ji replaced the ceremony of Pheras (going around the fire pit in Hindu marriage) with-the ceremony of Lavan in Sikh marriages.
  2. Guru Sahib started the ceremony of singing the ‘Anand Bani’ at the time of birth and marriage.
  3. Guru Sahib instructed the Sikhs to say the prayers to God and chant the name of God on all the sad occasions or .death ceremonies.

Question 20.
Write about the importance of Ramdaspur or Amritsar.
Answer:
The Sikhs got their own city of pilgrimage and an important business centre with the founding of Ramdaspur or Amritsar. With the passage of time, the city of Ramdaspur or Amritsar greatly contributed to the development of the Sikh community.

Question 21.
Write about the Baoli Sahib (water source) of Lahore.
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji had constructed a large well (Baoli) in Dubbi Bazaar in Lahore. It became a place of pilgrimage for his Sikh followers.

Question 22.
What was the need of compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib by Guru Arjan Dev Ji?
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji wanted that his Sikhs should be benefited from the true and divine hymns of Guru Sahiban for which he found it necessary to make available a true and sacred religious book. Therefore, Guru Sahib compiled Adi Granth Sahib and placed it in Sri Harmandir Sahib for the spiritual benefit of his Sikh followers.

Question 23.
Write two social reforms brought about by Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji brought about the following social reforms:

  1. Guru Sahib tried to encourage widow remarriage.
  2. Guru Sahib prohibited the use of liquor and intoxicants by his Sikh followers.

Question 24.
Write about the relationship between Guru Arjan Dev Ji and Akbar.
Answer:
Akbar had very friendly relations with Guru Arjan Dev Ji. The opponents of Guru Arjan Dev Ji tried to poison the ears of Akbar against Guru Sahib, but Akbar rebuffed them. Due to Guru Sahib’s advice, Akbar remitted the land tax of the farmers of Punjab during the year of bad harvests.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 25.
Why did Jahangir want to kill Guru Arjan Dev Ji?
Answer:

  1. The Mughal Emperor Jahangir was jealous of the rising popularity of Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
  2. He was perturbed (troubled) by the fact that like the Hindus, many Muslims were coming under the influence of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. Thus, the Mughal Emperor Jahangir wanted to put to death Guru Arjan Dev Ji.

Question 26.
Write the importance of the swords of ‘Miri’ and ‘Piri’
Answer:
Guru Hargobind Ji put on two swords and called them ‘Miri’ and ‘Piri’. The ‘Miri’ sword represented the leadership of Guru Hargobind Ji over the Sikhs in their worldly affairs. The sword ‘Piri’ indicated the leadership of Guru Sahib in spiritual matters of the Sikhs.

Question 27.
How did Guru Hargobind Sahib Ji fortify the city of Amritsar?
Answer:
Guru Hargobind Ji raised a thick wall all around the city of Amritsar. Guru Sahib also constructed a fort called ‘Lohgarh’ within the city and garrisoned it.

Answer the following questions in 30-50 words:

Question 1.
Describe the Baoli Sahib (water sources) at Goindwal Sahib.
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji completed the work of construction of the Baoli at Goindwal, which was started during the period of Guru Angad Dev Ji. Guru Amar Das Ji constructed 84 steps in the Baoli. Guru Sahib told his Sikh followers that whosoever would recite the hymns of ‘JupJi Sahib’ with full devotion on each of the 84 steps, he would become free from the cycle of births and deaths covering 84 lakh types of lives (Yonis) and achieve Moksha (Salvation). Indu Bushan Banerjee says that the Baoli played a significant role in the history of Sikh religion. The Baoli of Goindwal became a popular place of pilgrimage for the Sikhs. The Gurudwara Baoli Sahib stands there.

Question 2.
What is the meaning of the Manji System and why was it started?
Answer:
The Manji System was founded by Guru Amar Das Ji. The number of his Sikh followers had increased immensely by the time of Guru Amar Das Ji. However, Guru Amar Das Ji was very old and it was difficult for him to visit his large spiritual empire of Sikh followers in order to spread his teachings. Hence, Guru Sahib divided his spiritual empire into 22 regions called the Manjis. Each Manji was further divided into Pieces. The Manji system had great significance in the history of Sikh religion. Dr. G.C. Narang says that this work of Guru Sahib consolidated the foundations of Sikh religion and helped to spread Guru’s teachings in all parts of the country.

Question 3.
What reforms were introduced in marriage ceremonies by Guru Amar Das Ji?
Answer:
At the time of Guru Amar Das Ji, the influence of caste system was dominating the people of Punjab. The people considered it against their religion to marry outside one’s own caste. Guru Sahib believed that such a tradition had divided the people. Guru Sahib instructed his Sikh followers to break the caste barriers and permitted inter-caste marriages. Guru Sahib also reformed the marriage ceremonies. Guru Sahib started the ceremony of Lavan in place of Pheras. Bhai Jetha Ji (Guru Ram Das Ji) wrote the Lavans on the advice of Guru Amar Das Ji.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 4.
How did Guru Angad Dev Ji separate the Sikhs from the Udasi sect?
Answer:
Baba Sri Chand, the elder son of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, had founded the Udasi sect. He praised the life of an ascetic (monk or sanyasi). This idea of spiritual ascetic life was against the fundamental teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Angad Dev Ji made it clear to the Sikhs that the Sikh religion was a religion of the householders and not of the monks who broke the family ties for their spiritual life. There was no place for ascetics in the Sikh religion. Guru Sahib also declared that a Sikh who adopted a life of an ascetic was not a true Sikh. In this manner, Guru Sahib separated the Sikhs from the Udasis and consolidated the foundations of Sikh religion.

Question 5.
Write about the Anand Sahib.
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji had composed fresh Bani called Anand Sahib. Guru Sahib had composed the Anand Sahib at the time of birth of his grandson named Anand. It has forty hymns. Guru Amar Das Ji instructed his Sikh followers to sing Anand Sahib on the happy occasions in their lives like birth, marriage or any other similar occasion. After the composition of Anand Sahib, the need of Vedic hymns for Sikh community completely ended. The Sikhs sing the hymns of Anand Sahib on the occasions of happiness in their lives upto this day.

Question 6.
Write about the foundation of Ramdaspura or Amritsar.
Answer:
Guru Ram Das Ji founded Ramdaspura. This city is now called Amritsar. Guru Ram Das Ji had started the work of digging of two Sarovars (ponds) called Amritsar and Santokhsar in 1577. Guru Sahib found that it was difficult to look after the work of construction of the ponds from Goindwal. Hence, Guru Sahib decided to camp at the site of construction at Amritsar. His followers started visiting him at his camping site and some of them also stayed there, which led to the rise of a small township. This township was lovingly named Ramdaspur.

Guru Ram Das Ji tried to provide all the amenities to his followers who were staying there because of their devotion to him. Guru Sahib also established a small market there. That market became popular as ‘Market of Guru Ji’ or ‘Guru Ka Bazaar’. In this manner, the city became an important place of pilgrimage and trading centre for the Sikhs and contributed in a significant way to the growth of Sikh religion.

Question 7.
Write about Sri Harimandir Sahib.
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji had raised Sri Harimandir Sahib in the centre of the Sarovar Amritsar after the final union of Guru Ram Das Ji with the Divine Power. Sufi fakir, Mian Mir laid the foundation stone of Sri Harimandir Sahib in 1589. Guru Sahib had constructed doors in each of the four directions of Sri Harimandir Sahib. It was done to declare that the doors of Sri Harimandir Sahib were open to the people of all the castes and religions without distinction. Baba Budda Ji supervised the work of construction of Sri Harmandir Sahib and completed it in 1601. In 1604, Adi Granth Sahib was placed in Sri Harmandir Sahib and Baba Budda Ji was appointed as the first Granthi of Sri Harmandir Sahib.

Sri Harmandir Sahib is the main centre of pilgrimage for the Sikhs. According to one scholar, “Amritsar is for the Sikhs what Mecca is for the Muslims.”

Question 8.
What do you know about Tarn Taran Sahib?
Answer:
The town of Tarn Taran was founded by Guru Arjan Dev Ji. Tarn Taran has great significance in the history of Sikhs. Tarn Taran is an important place of pilgrimage like Amritsar for the Sikhs. A large number of Sikh pilgrims come to Tarn Taran and take bath in the Sarovar. It was because of Tarn Taran that the Jats of Majha region of Punjab adopted Sikh religion during the period of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. The Jats of the Majha region proved to be most courageous and fearless while fighting against the Mughals in the battles. Indu Bushan Banerjee remarks that the history of the Sikhs took a new turn with the entry of the Jats into Sikh religion.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 9.
What were the benefits of the Masand system for the Sikh religion?
Answer:
The Masand System played an important role in the development and organisation of the Sikh religion. The importance of the Masand System for Sikh religion was as under:
1. The system ensured regular and fixed donations for the Guru Gaddi. With a fixed income from donations, Guru Sahib was able to undertake much constructive work for the development of Sikh religion. Guru Arjan Dev Ji not only built tanks at Amritsar and Santokhsar, but also built new cities, constructed ponds, dug wells, etc.

2. Masand System, not only ensured fixed donations, but also, helped in spreading the message of Sikh religion more enthusiastically. Earlier, the work of spread of religion was done through Manji system. It was confined only to the Punjab during those days. However, Guru Arjan Dev Ji appointed Masands even outside Punjab. It helped in the spread of Sikh religion even outside.

3. Guru Sahib started holding his own court when he had an assured income through Masand System. The Masands and the devoted Sikhs brought donations and gifts to the court of Guru Arjan Dev Ji on every Baisakhi day and bowed their heads before him to seek his blessings. Gradually, the court of Guru Sahib acquired the status of a court of an emperor for the Sikhs and Sikh Sangat started calling Guru Arjan Dev Ji as Sachcha Padshah (The True Emperor) out of love and devotion for him.

Question 10.
Write about the daily life of Guru Hargobind Ji.
Answer:
Guru Hargobind Ji had changed his lifestyle according to his‘New Policy’. According to his new daily routine, after taking his bath early morning, Guru Sahib visited Sri Harimandir Sahib to give religious instruction. After the discourse, the Langar was served every day. After the Langar, Guru Sahib used to take rest for some time before leaving for hunting. Guru Hargobind Ji had instructed Abdul and Nathmal to sing songs of heroism (songs of vir rasa) on high notes in order to infuse courage into the Sikh Sangat. Guru Sahib organised special troupes of singers (Dhadis). In this manner, Guru Sahib created a new awareness among the Sikhs and created in them the spirit of courage.

Question 11.
What do you know about the ‘Akal Takht’?
Answer:
Guru Hargobind Ji used to give religious instructions at Sri Harimandir Sahib. Guru Sahib had constructed a new building called ‘Akal Takht’ (the Throne of Supreme God) in the western part of the premises of Sri Harimandir Sahib to give advice to the Sikhs in the worldly matters. There was raised a platform about 12 feet high. Guru Sahib used to solve the military and political problems of the Sikhs while sitting there. Guru Sahib also listened to heroic songs (songs of vir rasa) from his followers at Akal Takht. Guru Sahib also imparted physical training to his Sikh followers hear Akal Takht.

Question 12.
Throw light on any four measures taken by Guru Angad Dev Ji for the development of Sikhism.
Answer:
Guru Angad Dev Ji became the second Guru of the Sikhs after Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s demise in 1539. His period proved to be a blessing for the rise of Sikhism.

Guru Sahib contributed to the rise of Sikhism by doing the following work:

  1. Improvement of Gurumukhi Script. Guru Angad Dev Ji made improvements in the Gurumukhi script. .In order to popularise Gurumukhi, Guru Sahib wrote ‘Bal Bodh’ to help children to learn the alphabet or Gurumukhi.
  2. The Janam Sakhi of Guru Nanak Dev Ji and other Writings. Guru Angad Dev Ji instructed Bhai Bala Ji to write a Janam Sakhi of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Sahib also collected all the hymns of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. It helped the Sikhs to know the true instructions of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Angad Dev Ji also wrote his own Bani in line with the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
  3. Langar System. Guru Angad Dev Ji continued Langar system with full devotion. It helped in reducing the ill-feelings based on caste system among the people and helped in spreading the message of Sikh religion.
  4. Founding of Goindwal. Guru Angad Dev Ji founded the city of Goindwal. This city became an important Sikh religious centre during the period of Guru Amar Das Ji. Even today, it is one of the most important religious centres of Sikhism.

Question 13.
How was Masand system useful for the development of Sikhism?
Answer:
Refer to answer in 70-75 words to question no. 9 of section B.

Question 14.
Write a note on the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
Answer:
The Mughal Emperor Akbar had very cordial relations with Guru Arjan Dev Ji. However, Jahangir the next Mughal emperor, abandoned the policy of toleration after the death of Akbar. Jahangir was on the lookout for an opportunity to give mortal blow to Sikh religion. In the meantime, Prince Khusro, the son of Jahangir, revolted against his father. After being defeated at the hand of his father, Khusro came to Guru Arjan Dev Ji. Guru Sahib blessed him. Jahangir imposed a fine of two lakh rupees on Guru Sahib on the charge of helping rebellious Khusro. Guru Sahib showed his inability to pay. As a result, Guru Sahib was detained and subjected to severe torture. It infuriated the Sikhs. The Sikhs learned that the only course then left open to them was to rise in arms for the protection of their religion.

Answer the following questions in 100-120 words:

Question 1.
What is the contribution of Guru Angad Sahib to the development of Sikh religion?
Answer:
Guru Angad Dev Ji became the second Guru of the Sikh religion in 1539 after Guru Nanak Dev Ji. His period proved to be a blessing for the Sikh religion. Guru Sahib contributed to the development of the Sikh religion in the following manner:
1. Improvement in Gurumukhi Script. Guru Angad Dev Ji made improvements in the Gurumukhi script. In order to popularise Gurumukhi, Guru Sahib wrote ‘Bal Bodh’ to help the children learn the alphabet of Gurumukhi. The Gurumukhi was a common language of the people of the region. It helped in the promotion of Sikh religion. All the religious literature of Sikhism is written in Gurumukhi script.

2. The Janam Sakhi of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Angad Dev Ji instructed Bhai Bala Ji to write the Janam Sakhi of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Sahib also collected all the sayings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. It helped the Sikhs to follow the true path shown by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Sahib himself also wrote Bani in line with the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

3. The Langar System. Guru Aiigad Dev Ji continued the Langar system with full devotion. Langar was served to all the people without any distinction based on caste system. It helped in decreasing the feelings of inequality based on caste system and helped in spreading the message of Sikh religion.

4. Separating the Udasis from the Sikhs. The eldest son of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, Bhai Sri Chand had established the Udasi sect. He had popularised asceticism (Sanyas). The idea of asceticism was against the fundamental teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Angad Dev Ji made it clear to his followers that the Sikh religion is a religion of householders. There was no place for ascetics (Sanyasis) in it. Guru Sahib declared that those Sikhs, who believed in asceticism, were not true Sikhs. In this manner, by separating Udasis from the Sikh community, Guru Sahib strengthened the Sikh religion.

5. Laid the foundation of Goindwal. Guru Angad Dev Ji founded the city of Goindwal. This city became an important Sikh religious centre during the period of Guru Amar Das Ji. Even today, it is one of the most important religious centres of Sikhism.

6. Enforced Discipline. Guru Angad Dev Ji maintained strict discipline in his Sikh community. He turned out Bhai Satta and Bhai Balwand out of Sikh Sangat for breaking discipline. However, on the request of Bhai Laddha, Guru Sahib pardoned them. This episode served as a warning to the indisciplined elements in the Sikh community.

It is true that Guru Angad Dev Ji had given a distinct identity to the Sikh religion by making improvements in Gurumukhi script. The Sikh followers got their own separate script and language. The langar system freed the Sikh religion from the influence of caste system. It helped Sikh religion to establish its own separate identity different from the Hindu religion. All the credit goes to Guru Angad Dev Ji for all such developments which made Sikh religion a distinct religion.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 2.
What work was done by Guru Amar Das Ji for the development of Sikh religion?
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji occupies an important place in the history of Sikh religion. The seeds of the religion which Guru Nanak Dev Ji had sowed, sprouted during the period of Guru Angad Dev Ji. Guru Amar Das Ji raised a fence around the new religion and saved it from getting absorbed into Hindu religion. Guru Amar Das Ji helped the Sikh community to adopt new customs and traditions in their social life, which developed the real traits of Sikh religion.

They were different from the social customs and traditions of the Hindu religion. No doubt, Guru Sahib was a great divine soul. Payne, a scholar, called him an aggressive reformer. Another scholar has praised Guru Sahib as a genius and a man of justice. It is a historical fact that it was during his period that Sikh religion established its distinctive identity.

A brief survey of the work of Guru Amar Das Ji is as follows:
1. Construction of Baoli at Goindwal. Guru Amar Das Ji completed the construction work of Baoli at Goindwal which was started during the period of Guru Angad Dev Ji. Guru Amar Das Ji constructed 84 steps in the Baoli. Guru Sahib said that a Sikh could get freedom from the cycle of births and deaths covering 84 lakh forms of lives by reciting the hymns of Jupji Sahib on each step. The Baoli of Goindwal became an important place of pilgrimage for the Sikhs.

2. Langar System. Guru Amar Das Ji also made the Langar system popular which helped further in the spread of Sikhism. Guru Sahib made some more rules for Langar System. As per the new rules, whosoever wanted to earn the benefit of participation in Sangat, he must partake Langar with the rest of the Sangat before joining it in the presence of Guru Sahib. While partaking food in the Langar, Brahmins, Kshatriyas, Vaishs, Shudras, Kings, common men and people of all castes and tribes sat in one row and partook food.

Langar system propagated the message of Sikh religion in a more forceful and effective manner. It ended the discrimination based on castes. It developed the feelings of unity and equality in the Sikh Sangat. As a consequence, it bound the Sikhs into a strong bond of unity.

3. Collection of the Sayings of Guru Sahiban. Guru Angad Dev collected the true ‘Bani’ of Guru Nanak Dev Ji and added his own ‘Bani’ also. Guru Angad Dev Ji entrusted the sacred collection to Guru Amar Das Ji. Guru Amar Das Ji also composed his ‘Bani’ and added to the collection. In this manner, the true ‘Bani’ was preserved in a pure form and later found place in the ‘Adi Granth Sahib’. The grandson of Guru Amar Das Ji, Guru Arjan Dev Ji accomplished the ultimate task.

4. Manji System. The number of followers of Sikhism had increased manifold by the time of Guru Amar Das Ji. Guru Amar Das Ji found it difficult to reach all his disciples who were spread over a large area. Guru Sahib divided his spiritual territory into 22 regions. Each region was called a ‘Manji’. Each Manji was a centre of religious preaching and Guru Sahib appointed learned and reliable Sikh devotees to control each Manji.

The establishment of Manji system was an important step in the systematic organisation of the Sikh religion. G.C. Narang in his book ‘Transformation of Sikhism’, remarks that the introduction of Manji System by Guru Sahib had strengthened the Sikh religion and contributed to the spread of Guru’s divine message in different regions of the country in a more effective way.

5. Separation of Sikhs from the Udasis. The Udasi sect of Baba Sri Chand had also become popular in the early period of Guru Amar Das Ji’s Guru Gaddi, There was a possibility of Sikh religion losing its identity by being merged with the Udasi sect. It is recognised by many historians that Guru Amar Das Ji had judged the situation and strongly spoken against the main principles of asceticism of Udasi sect, which were against the principles of Sikh religion as founded by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Amar Das Ji helped the Sikh Sangat to understand clearly that they would not be able to become true Sikhs, if they adopted the principles of Udasi sect. In this manner, because of the efforts of Guru Amar Das Ji, the Sikh religion maintained its separate identity and flourished.

6. Separate Sikh ceremonies. Guru Amar Das Ji instructed the Sikhs to discontinue useless customs and traditions. Among the Hindus, it was a tradition of weeping and crying over the death of one’s near ones. Guru Sahib advised his disciples to meditate on God in such situations in one’s life instead of performing useless ceremonies and rites. Guru Sahib also started a new ceremony for marriage which was called Anand Karaj.

7. Composition of Anand Sahib. Guru Sahib composed a new Bani which is called ‘Anand Sahib’. Anand Sahib ended the importance of Vedic hymns for the Sikhs and gave them their own sacred literature.
Thus, the period of Guru Amar Das Ji’s Gurugaddi and his sacred literature occupy the most important place in the history of Sikh religion. Guru Sahib constructed a Baoli, introduced Manji System, elaborated the Langar System, and introduced new traditions and customs in the Sikh religion which was well-organised during his days.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 3.
Describe the social reforms introduced by Guru Amar Das Ji.
Answer:
During the times of Guru Amar Das Ji, the society was suffering from many social evils. Guru Amar Das Ji was fully aware of those shortcomings and brought about numerous social reforms.

The main achievements of Guru Amar Das Ji in the field of social reforms are as follow:
1. Criticism of Caste System. Guru Amar Das Ji made efforts to end the evils in the society caused by caste system. Wherever Guru Sahib went, he criticised the differences among the social groups based on caste system. Guru Sahib was of the view that those caste differences were against the wishes of Supreme God and a hindrance in the way of social development. The 19th century leaders of social reform movements had the same views and all their activities to reform social condition were similar to what Guru Amar Das Ji did in the 16th century.

2. Opposed to Untouchability. Guru Amar Das Ji made successful efforts to end untouchability. No untouchability or Jati considerations were permitted and observed in the Langar. People of all castes, tribes and social status sat together and partook food with brotherly feelings. It is said that Emperor Akbar and Raja of Hamirpur partook food in the Langar according to the rules laid down by Guru Amar Das Ji.

3. Supported Widow Remarriage. Widow remarriage was not permitted during the period of Guru Amar Das Ji. The widows were forced to live a miserable life after the death of their husbands. Guru Amar Das Ji strongly supported widow remarriage and tried to secure a respectable position for women in the society.

4. Condemnation of the Practice of Sati. Another most shameful social evil was the custom of Sati. The historians believe that it was Guru Amar Das Ji who had raised a voice of protest against the custom of Sati for the first time in the history of India. Even Akbar borrowed the idea of taking some measures against the practice of Sati from Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib declared that a woman was not a true Sati who had burnt herself alive on the pyre of her husband. Guru Sahib opined that a true Sati could be a woman who lived her life in the memory of her dead husband. For that, the widow should lead a highly moral life and purity and spend her time in praying to God.

5. Criticism of Purdah System. Guru Amar Das Ji strongly criticised the Purdah System prevalent among the women. Guru Sahib considered purdah as the main hindrance in the development of society. Guru Sahib did not permit purdah for women who volunteered to serve the Langar and wanted to participate in Sangat.

6. Criticism of the Use of the Intoxicants. Guru Amar Das Ji instructed the Sikhs to remain away from the intoxicants. In one of his ‘Shabads’, Guru Sahib has strongly criticized the use of liquor. Guru Amar Das Ji guided his followers to pray for forgiveness and become addicted to the spirit of Name. Guru Sahib condemned the addiction to intoxicants. Guru Sahib suggested an alternative of seeking enjoyment in social service.

7. Promotion of Brotherhood among the Sikhs through New Festivals. Guru Amar Das Ji instructed the Sikh Sangat to celebrate three main festivals, i.e. Maghi, Diwali and Baisakhi in a new way. On the advice of Guru Sahib, the Sikh Sangat used to gather around the house of Guru Sahib and celebrated those festivals as he directed. This reform played a major role in uniting the Sangat in a strong bond of brotherhood.

8. New Ceremonies concerning Birth and Death. Guru Amar Das Ji a’-o started new and distinctive ceremonies for birth, marriage, and death for the Sil ‘ Thncp ceremonies are different from the ceremonies of the Hindus. There was assistance of the Brahmins in performing those ceremonies. These reforms played a major role in imparting a separate identity to the Sikh religion.

It is a historical fact that the reforms undertaken by Guru Amar Das Ji had given a new strength to Sikh religion.

Question 4.
What efforts were made by Guru Ram Das Ji for the development of Sikhism?
Answer:
The fourth Guru Sahib of Sikh religion was Guru Ram Das Ji. Guru Sahib made the following contribution to the growth of Sikh religion:
1. Laid the foundation of Amritsar City. Guru Ram Das Ji laid on the land bought during the period of Guru Amar Das Ji, the foundation of a city called Ramdaspur. Presently, it is called Amritsar. In 1577, when Guru Sahib started construction work on the two ponds (Sarovars) called Amritsar and Santokhsar, he found that it was not easy to supervise the construction of ponds from Goindwal. Guru Sahib encamped at the construction site. His Sikh devotees also came after him and pitched their tents around the ponds. The camping place developed into a small settlement. That settlement became popular as Ramdaspur. Guru Sahib wanted to provide every facility to his devotees who had followed him to the place out of love for him. Guru Sahib, therefore, invited 52 merchants belonging to 52 different trades and provided all the things required by the settlers. They set up a type of Bazaar which is now called Guru Ka Bazaar. The city soqn acquired the status of an important place of pilgrimage for the Sikhs. They stopped visiting the places of Hindu pilgrimage.

2. Introduction of Masand System. Guru Ramdas Ji needed a large amount of money to complete the construction work of ponds (Sarovars) of Amritsar and Santokhsar. Therefore, Guru Sahib started Masand System. Guru Sahib deputed his trusted Sikh devotees to go to far off places to spread the message of Sikh religion and collect donations. Such devotees were called Masands. Those Masands successfully spread the message of Sikhism and collected large donations. This system played a major role in the spread of Sikh religion to far off places. The Masand system proved to be a link between the Sikh devotees and Guru Sahib and established an emotional bond between them.

3. End of the Conflict with the Udasis. Guru Angad Dev Ji and Guru Amar Das Ji had separated Udasi sect from the Sikh community but Guru Ram Das Ji adopted a kind attitude towards the Udasi sect. According to a tradition, once. Baba Sri Chand, the founder of Udasi sect came to meet Guru Ram Das Ji. During his meeting, Baba Sri Chand asked Guru Sahib that why he had kept a long beard. Guru Sahib gave an answer full of humility when he said that his beard was meant to dust the feet of great personalities like Baba Sri Chand. Baba Sri Chand was highly impressed by the answer of Guru Sahib and he accepted Guru Sahib as superior to him. In this manner, the conflict between the Udasi sect and the Sikh community ended. It immensely helped in the spread of Sikh religion.

4. Social Reforms. Guru Ram Das Ji continued the work of social reforms which was started by Guru Amar Das Ji. Guru Sahib continued new ceremonies which were started by Guru Amar Das Ji. Guru Sahib also criticised the custom of Sati, encouraged widow remarriage, and introduced new ceremonies to be performed on the occasions of marriage and death.

5. Friendship with Emperor Akbar. Emperor Akbar had adopted the policy of tolerance towards all the religions. He was highly impressed by the teachings of Sikh Guru Sahiban and had great respect and regard for Guru Ram Das Ji. (He had also special regards for Guru Amar Das Ji). It is a part of history that Akbar had pleaded before Guru Sahib to accept the gift of 500 bighas of land. The city of Amritsar flourished on that land afterwards. Similarly, when Punjab suffered from drought, Akbar remitted the land tax during the year of drought on the advice of Guru Ram Das Ji. It gave big relief to the farmers of Punjab.

6. Guru Gaddi made Hereditary. Guru Ram Das Ji made the Guru Gaddi hereditary before his final union with Divine Power. Guru Ram Das Ji appointed his most capable son Arjan Dev Ji as his successor and thus made the Guru Gaddi hereditary. But keeping in view the principles of bestowing the Guru Gaddi as introduced by Guru Nanak Dev Ji, Guru Ram Das Ji maintained the principle of selection based, on merit.

Guru Ram Das Ji had started a new chapter in the history of Sikhism by adopting the principle of heredity for succession to Guru Gaddi. Latif is of the opinion that this step changed the nature of Guru Gaddi. Thereafter, the Sikhs, who followed Guru Sahiban as their spiritual leaders, looked on them as their emperors also. However, the rule established by Guru Nanak Dev Ji that Guru Gaddi was to be conferred on the most capable follower of the Guru was maintained.

Guru Ram Das Ji guided the Sikhs for a shorter period but even within that period, the Sikh religion gained much popularity,

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 5.
What was the contribution of Guru Arjan Dev Ji to the development of Sikhism?
Answer:
The histcfry of Sikh religion entered a new phase with the coming of Guru Arjan Dev Ji to Guru Gaddi. It was the result of his efforts that Sikhs were blessed with Harmandir Sahib Ji and numerous other places of pilgrimage. Not only that, the Sikhs got their first sacred and divine book when Guru Arjan Dev Ji compiled the Adi Granth Sahib. The Hindus had their Ramayana, the Muslims their Quran Sharif, the Christians their Bible, and the Sikhs their Guru Granth Sahib Ji.

A brief description of the activities and contributions of Guru Arjan Dev Ji is given as follows:
1. Construction of Sri Harmandir Sahib (Pb. 2013 (I)). Guru Arjan Dev Ji completed the work of construction of Amritsar and Santokhsar Sarovars after the expiry of Guru Ram Das Ji. Guru Sahib constructed Sri Harmandir Sahib in the midst of Amritsar Sarovar. Guru Sahib constructed a door each in all the four directions of Sri Harmandir Sahib. These four doors convey the message that Sri Harmandir Sahib is open to all the religions, castes and tribes without any discrimination. Guru Sahib told his followers that a pilgrimage to Sri Harmandir Sahib would bestow the benefit of 68 places of pilgrimage of the Hindus. In this manner, Sri Harmandir Sahib became one of the most sacred and important rebgious places.

2. Foundation of Tarn Taran. Guru Arjan Dev Ji founded the city of Tarn Taran as well. The city was founded in the heart of Majha region. It is also an important place of pilgrimage like Amritsar for the Sikhs. Guru Ji also constructed many other buildings and Sarovars.

3. Construction of Baoli at Lahore. On his tour to Lahore, Guru Arjan Dev Ji got constructed a Baoli in the Dubbi Bazaar. The Baoli soon became an important place of pilgrimage for the Sikhs of the surrounding region.

4. Foundation of Hargobindpur and Chheratta. Guru Arjan Dev Ji founded the city of Hargobindpur on the banks of river Beas to celebrate the birth of his son Hargobind Ji. Apart from this he also got a well dug at Chheratta near Amritsar in order to provide water to the local people. Guru Sahib also arranged for six pulleys to draw Water from the well and the area is known after those pulleys as Chheratta.

5. Foundation of Kartarpur, In 1593, Guru Arjan Dev Ji founded the city of Kartarpur and also built a Sarovar in Kartarpur which is called Gangsar.

6. Improvement in the Masand System. Guru Arjan Dev Ji felt the need to improve Masand system. Guru Sahib instructed the Sikh followers to deposit one-tenth (Daswandh) of their annual income with the Masands. The Masands deposited the collections in the main treasury (Guru Ki Golak) at Amritsar on every Baisakhi day. The Masands appointed their representatives to collect donations. Those representatives were called Sangatias. The one-tenth donation was called Daswandh. Apart from the work of collection of Daswandh, the Masands also spread the message of Sikh religion.

7. Compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib. Gum Arjan Dev Ji bestowed upon the Sikhs a sacred and religious book by compiling the Adi Granth Sahib. Guru Ar^an Dev Ji compiled Adi Granth Sahib at Ramsar. Bhai Gurdas Ji assisted Guru Sahib in its compilation. The work of compilation was cofnpleted in 1604. Guru Sahib included the hymns of first four Gurus, followed by the hymns of Bhakti saints and finally the sayings of Bhatt Bahiyan. Guru Arjan Dev Ji also included his own Bani in the holy book.

8. Encouraged Horse Trade. Guru Arjan Dev Ji encouraged the Sikhs to start trading in horses. The Sikhs were benefited from the trading in horses in the following ways:

  • Trading in horses was the most profitable business in those days. As a result, the Sikhs became very rich by trading in the horses. They contributed Daswand regularly out of their income from this trade.
  • The Sikhs became fully trained in making a selection of good horses. It helped them in the long run in organising a Sikh cavalry.

9. Spread of Religious Teachings. Guru Arjan Dev Ji made many people his followers by his religious teachings. Guru Sahib impressed the people with his ideals, teachings, amiable personality, sweet temper, and toleration. Many Muslims also joined the Sikh religion under the influence of Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
Thus the Sikh religion progressed tremendously under the spiritual leadership of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. The Adi Granth Sahib, the most sacred book of the Sikhs, was compiled, the cities like Tara Taran, Kartarpur, Hargobindpur, were founded and the Sikh religion was blessed with Sri Harmandir Sahib.

Question 6.
Describe the origin, development and merits of the Masand System.
Answer:
Origin of the Masand System: Guru Ram Das Ji, the fourth Guru of the Sikhs, started the Masand System. He felt the need for more money when he was looking after the work of digging of Amritsar Sarovar and Santokhsar Sarovar. Guru Ram Das Ji did not have enough resources. Therefore, Guru Sahib deputed his trusted followers in different directions of the country to collect funds from his Sikh devotees. They were called the Masands or Ram Dasis. These followers were the close confidants of Guru Ram Das Ji. Wherever those followers or Masands went, they collected the donations and spread the message of Sikh religion.

Progress of the Masand System: Guru Arjan Dev Ji made improvements in the Masand system and made it an institution that was more effective. Before the period of Guru Arjan Dev Ji, the donations to earlier Guru Sahiban were not fixed and were irregular. Guru Arjan Dev Ji had started construction work of many buildings and Sarovars for which he required a fixed and regular inflow of cash. Apart from this, it had become difficult to collect the donations from numerous Sikh followers whose number had increased manifold. Guru Arjan Dev Ji gave a proof of his superior managing skill by providing the solution for the existing problems of organization of the Sikh religion.

Guru Sahib improved the organization of Masand system by taking the following measures:

  1. Guru Sahib fixed the amount of donation to be made by his Sikh devotees to him. Guru Sahib enjoined upon his devotees to donate one-tenth of their annual income for the maintenance of Langar.
  2. Gum Sahib appointed his representatives, who were called the Masands for the collection of Daswandh from his Sikh devotees. The Masands deposited the collections in the treasury of Gum Sahib (Gum Ki Golak) at Amritsar on Baisakhi day every year. The receipts were issued to the Masands for the donations received at Amritsar.
  3. The Masands had appointed their representatives who were called the Sangtias, to collect the Daswandh. The Sangtias collected the Daswandhs from far off places and deposited them in the treasury of the Guru.
  4. The Sangtias and Masands considered it a sin to use even a single penny out of the donations for personal use. Gum Sahib had already ordained on this issue that whosoever embezzled the money of Daswandh, would become the victim of physical sufferings.
  5. The Masands did not confine their activities only to the collection of Daswandhs, they also employed their energies for spreading the message of the Sikh religion. Gum Sahib ensured at the time of appointment of a Sikh as a Masand that he had a high moral character and deep faith in the Sikh religion.

Importance and Benefits of the Masand System: The Masand system played an important role in building and consolidation of the Sikh religion. The importance of Masand System for the Sikh religion can be given as follows:
1. The donations to Guru Gaddi became fixed and regular. It helped Guru Sahib to continue with his constmction work. Gum Sahib founded not only the Sarovars at Amritsar and Santokhsar but also built many cities, ponds, wells etc with the regular donations. The constmctive work of Guru Sahib contributed in a significant way to the spread and popularity of Sikh religion.

2. On the one hand, the Masand System ensured a regular income to the Guru Ji and on the other, it popularised the Sikh religion in an effective manner. Earlier, Manji System carried out the work of spread of the Sikh religion. The Manji system had confined its activities to the Punjab region. Guru Sahib appointed Masands even outside Punjab. It resulted in the spread of Sikh religion in other parts of the country because the Masands collected not only the Daswandh but also devoted their energies for spreading the message of Sikh religion.

3. Guru Sahib started holding his own court with the regular donations received in the form of Daswandh. The Masands and devoted Sikhs brought donations and gifts to the court of Guru Arjan Dev Ji on every Baisakhi and bowed their heads before him to seek his blessings. Gradually, the court of Guru Sahib acquired the status of a court of an emperor and the Sikh Sangat started calling Guru Arjan Dev Ji as Sachcha Padshah (The True Emperor) out of love and devotion for him.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 7.
Describe the ‘New Policy’ of Guru Hargobind Ji.
Answer:
Guru Hargobind Ji, the son of Guru Arjan Dev Ji, became the sixth Guru of the Sikhs after the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. Guru Hargobind Ji adopted a ‘New Policy’. The main feature of his new policy was to make the Sikhs peace loving as well as courageous and fearless.

The main features of the ‘New Policy’ of Guru Hargobind Ji are the following:
1. The Royal Insignias and the title of ‘Sachcha Padshah’: Guru Hargobind Ji adopted, the title of ‘Sachcha Padshah’ and put on a number of royal insignias in line with his ‘New Policy’. Guru Sahib started wearing princely dress and discontinued using the saintly headgear and woollen beads (sayli) which were the symbols of saints and fakirs. Guru Sahib put on two swords and a crest (kalgi) in place of woollen beads (sayli) and saintly headgear. Guru Sahib also kept bodyguards for self-defence just like the princes of the contemporary times.

2. Miri and Piri: Guru Hargobind Ji had become the military leader of the Sikhs besides being their spiritual leader. From then onwards, Guru Sahib was ‘Mir’ (Militatry Commander) and ‘Pir’ (Religious Leader) of the.Sikhs. Guru Sahib put on two swords to represent his new role as ‘Mir’ and ‘Pir’ of his Sikhs. Guru Sahib named one sword as ‘Piri’ and the second as ‘Miri’. Guru Sahib gave special attention to the physical fitness of the Sikhs. Guru Sahib encouraged his Sikh followers to take exercise regularly, to participate in wrestling bouts, to go on hunting and to receive training in horse riding. Guru Sahib thus transformed his saintly followers into saint soldiers by adopting his ‘New Policy’.

3. Construction of Akal Takht: Guru Hargobind Ji took upon himself the responsibility of guiding the worldly activities of his Sikh followers apart from his role of being their true Guru in the sphere of spiritual life. Guru Sahib imparted, spiritual knowledge at Sri. Harmandir Sahib. In order to guide the Sikhs in their worldly affairs, Guru Sahib built Akal Takht (Throne of Supreme God-The Timeless) near Sri Harmandir Sahib. Guru Sahib listened to the military and political problems of the Sikhs while sitting on a raised platform 12 feet high at the Akal Takht.

4. Raising of Army: Guru Hargobind Ji raised an army for self-defence of the Sikhs. There were numerous professional soldiers and volunteers in his army. The fearless and courageous Jats of Majha region volunteered to join his army. According to one estimate, Guru Sahib had 800 horses, 300 horse riders, and 60 musketeers. Guru Sahib was served by a contingent of 500 such volunteers who did not seek any salary. Besides this army, Guru Sahib was also served by a separate contingent of Afghan (Pathan) soldiers headed by Painda Khan.

5. Keeping of Horses and Arms: Guru Hargobind Ji took special measures to make his ‘New Policy’ successful. Guru Sahib advised his Sikh followers to make donations of horses and arms as far as possible. Consequently, Guru Sahib collected many horses and a large number of arms.

6. Fortification of Amritsar: Guru Hargobind Ji raised a thick wall around the city of Ramdaspur (Amritsar) for its defence and security. The fort of Lohgarh was built and stocked with armaments and other military provisions.

7. New Daily Routine: Guru Hargobind Ji also made changes in his daily routine. According to his ‘New Policy’ his new daily routine was that after taking his bath early in the morning, Guru Sahib visited Sri Harmandir Sahib to give religious instruction. After the discourse, the Langar was served every day under his supervision. After the Langar, Guru Sahib used to take rest for some time before leaving for hunting. Guru Hargobind Ji had instructed Abdul and Nathamal to sing songs of heroism (songs of vir rasa) on high notes in order to infuse courage in the Sikh Sangat. Guru Sahib organised special troupes of singers (Dhadis). In this manner, Guru Sahib raised a new awareness among the Sikhs and made them brave and fearless.

8. Inculcated the spirit of Self-Defence: The core of the ‘New Policy’ was to inculcate’ the spirit of self-defence among his Sikh followers. Therefore, the aim of raising the army was neither to grab the Jand of others nor to intimidate any one. No doubt, Guru Sahib valiantly fought battles against the Mughals, but in no way, those battles were motivated by any lust for territory. Rather they were genuine efforts for self-defence and survival.

Question 8.
Besides adopting the New Policy what other measures were taken by Guru Hargobind Ji for the development of Sikhism?
Answer:
Guru Hargobind Ji was the only son of Guru Arjan Dev Ji, the fifth Guru Sahib. Guru Hargobind Ji was bom on June, 1595 in village Wadali in District Amritsar. Guru Sahib was a precocious child. Guru Sahib became the sixth Guru of the Sikhs after the martyrdom of his father, the fifth guru, Guru Arjan Dev Ji in 1606 and successfully guided the course of Sikh religion upto 1645. Gum Sahib made significant contribution, to the development of Sikh religion by adopting the ‘New Policy’ and winning battles against the Mughals.

A brief survey of the contribution of Gum Hargobind Ji to Sikhism is given as under:
1. Stay at Kiratpur: The king of Kahlur, Raja Kalyan Chand, was a follower of Guru Sahib. The Raja had given land to Gum Gaddi. Gum Sahib built a city called Kiratpur on that land. Gum Sahib made the city his abode in 1635. Gum Sahib lived the last ten years of his life at Kiratpur and spent his time in spreading the message of Sikh religion.

2. Conversion of Hill Chiefs to Sikhism: Gum Hargobind Ji converted many people from hilly regions to Sikh religion. Many hill chiefs had accepted Sikhism under his influence. However, the people of hilly region did not continue to follow the Sikh religion for a long period. The royal families reverted to their old practices of idol worship and other related ceremonies. Such practices were not permitted by Sikh religion.

3. The Religious Tours of Guru Hargobind Ji: Jahangir, the Mughal Emperor, became a friend of Guru Hargobind Ji when he released Guru Sahib from his confinement in Gwalior fort after realising his mistake. Guru Sahib undertook religious tours during that period of peace. Guru Sahib first visited Amritsar and then Lahore. At Lahore, Guru Sahib raised Gurudwara Dera Sahib in the memory of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. From Lahore, Guru Sahib went to Kashmir passing through Gujranwala and Bhimbar (Gujarat). Guru Sahib had made many followers in Kashmir. Guru Sahib inaugurated ‘Sangat’ in Kashmir. Bhai Sewa Das was deputed as representative of Guru Sahib in the ‘Sangat’.

Guru Sahib visited Nankana Sahib also. On his return journey from there, Guru Sahib spent some time at Amritsar. Guru Sahib also visited Nanakmatta (Gorakhmatta) in Uttar Pardesh. The yogis at Nanakmatta ran away from the city on seeing the grandeur of the entourage of Guru Hargobind Ji. Guru Sahib stayed there for some time to propagate the message of Sikh religion and reactivated the Sangat system. On his way back to Punjab, Guru Sahib also toured Malwa region of Punjab. Guru Sahib returned to Amritsar after staying for sometime at Dharauli Bhai (Ferozepur)

4. Deputed Religious Preachers: Guru Hargobind Ji remained involved in the battles upto 1635. Due to his pre-occupation, Guru Sahib deputed his eldest brother Bhai Gurditta (a saintly person with a big following) for preaching and spreading Sikh religion. Bhai Gurditta sent his four representatives named Bhai Almast, Phul, Gauda, and Balu Hasan for this task. Almast spread the message of Sikh religion in Nanakmatta and Dacca; Gauda and Phul in Doab and Malwa and Balu Hasan in Kashmir, Hazara, and Pathohar. Guru Sahib also sent Bhai Bidhi Chand to Bengal, Bhai Gurdas to Kabul and then to Benaras for preaching the Sikh faith.

5. Appointment of Guru Har Rai Ji as Successor: Guru Hargobind appointed his grandson Har Rai (son of Bhai Gurditta) as his successor before joining with the Divine Power.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 9.
Describe the work of Guru Har Rai Ji in the development of Sikhism.
Answer:
Guru Har Rai Ji was the seventh Guru of the Sikhs. Guru Sahib took over the Guru Gaddi after Guru Hargobind Ji’s demise. Guru Har Rai was a kind-hearted and a peace-loving person.

A brief description of the history of the Sikhs during the period of Guru Har Rai Ji (1645-1661) is given below:
1. Contribution-to Sikh Religion: Guru Har Rai Ji abandoned the policy of wars and always followed the policy of peace. Guru Sahib followed the footprints of Guru Nanak Dev Ji throughout his life. Guru Sahib spent most of his time at Kiratpur and extensively popularized Sikh religion. Guru Sahib always encouraged people to live a religious life and taught them to follow the true path. Guru Sahib made the following contribution to Sikh religion:

  1. Guru Sahib organised a religious congregation every morning and evening to spread the message of Sikh religion. Guru Sahib always stressed upon his followers to lead a pious life.
  2. Guru Sahib had converted numerous people to Sikh religion. The prominent persons among his new followers were Bairagi Bhagat Gir (Bhagat Bhagwan), Bhai Sangatia, Bhai Gauda and Bhai Bhagat.

Guru Har Rai Ji deputed many preachers to different places for the propagation of Sikh religion. Guru Sahib renamed Bairagi Bhagat Gir as Bhai Bhagat Bhagwan and sent him to spread the message of Sikh religion in the eastern part of the country. It is said that Bhai Bhagat Bhagwan Ji was such a powerful preacher that he established 360 centres (gaddis) in India, which are still functioning. Another important person who was converted to Sikh religion under the influence of Guru Har Rai Ji was Sangatia of Kartarpur.

He was renamed as Bhai Pheru. Bhai Pheru Ji was entrusted with the responsibility of preaching the Sikh faith in the central Punjab. It is said that Bhai Pheru established many centres (gaddis) and it was he who took the true message of Guru Nanak Dev Ji to the common man in ,true sense during the period of Guru Har Rai Ji. Guru Har Rai Ji himself toured numerous, places in Punjab and converted many people to the Sikh religion. Guru Sahib preached mainly at Kartarpur, Mukandpur (Jalandhar), Dosanjh, and in Malwa region. The Sikh religion made much progress under Guru

2. Blessed Phul and his Descendants. It is said that while Guru Har Rai Ji was on his religious tour, Guru Sahib stayed fear some time in the village Nathana in Malwa region. While Guru, Sahib was staying at Nathana, two real brothers, Kala end Karam Chand often used to visit him. One day, Kala brought his nephews, Sandali and Phul along with him .before Guru Sahib. During the meeting, Guru: Sahib observed that Phul was patting; his stomach. Guru Sahib inquired the cause bf suehian act by Phul. Kala explained, to Guru Sahib that Phul could not speak. Kala told that Phul was patting his stomach, to convey that he was hungry. Guru Sahih heing a kind-hearted person, highly moved. Guru Sahib blessed him with a boon that Phul would become famous and wealthy and his horses would , i sdonki water on the banks of Yamuna.,

Guru Sahib also announced that the descendants of Phul would rule for many generations and their fame and prosperity would continue to increase as long as they (continued to follow the preachings of Guru. Sebib. It is said that Kala also brought his own children on the persuasion of his wife to seek boon for them. Guru Sahib also blessed them. Guru Sahib blessed Kala, thah his children would own. large tracts of land and they would not pay tribute to anyone. The blessings of Guru, Sdhib bore fruit. The descendants of Phul ruled over Nabha, Jind, and Patiala kingdoms for 200 years and became famous as Phulkin.

3. Guru Har Rai Ji’s help to Dara Shikoh: Guru Har Rai Ji was a peace loving person send avoided wars and controversies. However, Guru Sahib got involved in irrt a tjAditical controversy during’the later part of his life. The reason of the trouble was his friendship with the Mughal Prince Dara Shikoh, the eldest son of Shahjahan.

A war of succession took place among the sons of Shahjahan in 1657-58. Aurangzeb , emerged Victorious and Dara Shikoh, who was a strong claimant to the Mughal throne; suffered a humiliating defeat. Dara Shikoh ran away to Punjab along with ’his family. Dara Shikoh had acquaintance with Guru Sahib. Therefore, he visited; Guru Sahib to seek his blessings and help. Guru Sahib was a kind-hearted and peace-loving person. Guru Sahib did not provide any military help to the prince. However, Guru Sahib blessed him and allowed him to stay with him for some time.

4. Summons to Guru Har Rai Ji from Delhi. After his accession to the throne, Aurangzeb wanted to learn about the actual nature of the help given by Guru Sahib to Dara Shikoh. Aurangzeb also believed that the Sikh religion was anti-Islam. Hence, he summoned Guru Sahib to Delhi. Guru Sahib did not gq to Delhi but sent his son, Ram Rai to the court of Aurangzeb at Delhi as vjiis representative. Aurangzeb wanted to establish that some of the contents of the ‘Adi Granth Sahib’ were against the principles of Islam. In order to prove his point, Aurangzeb pointed out a verse in ‘Asa Di Var’ by Guru Nanak Dev JL ’|he meaning of the verse was,

“The clay of a Musalman may find its Way into the kiln of a potter, who makes vessels and bricks out of it. It cries out as it burns.’ i Ram Rai tried to save hitnself from the wrath of diehard Aurangzeb and interpreted it by changing the wording of the verse. Ram Rai explained that the word “Musalman’ was wrongly written by the scribe. He declared that the actual word in the verso was ‘baiman’ i.e. a faithless or a cheat. Aurangzeb felt happy. He awarded a Jagir to Ram Rai in Dehradun. Ram Rai saved himself from the wrath of Aurangzeb but it pained Guru Sahib, when he found that his son had not stood by his convictions as demanded by the Sikh religion.

5. Nomination of Har Krishan Ji as Successor to Guru Gaddi: Guru Har Rai Ji did not pardon Ram Rai for his lack of conviction and for cowardice. Hence, Guru Sahib denied him the right to succeed him to Guru Gaddi. Guru Sahib excommunicated him from the Sikh community and selected his five years old son Har Krishan Ji as his successor. Guru Sahib finally merged with the Divine Power on October 6, 1661, after occupying the Guru Gaddi for seventeen years.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 10.
What was the contribution of Guru Har Krishan Ji to the development of Sikhism?
Answer:
Guru Har Krishan Ji was born on July 7, 1656 at Kiratpur. The name of his mother was Mata Sulakhani and of his father, Guru Har Rai Ji. Guru Sahib became the eighth Guru of the Sikhs in 1661. Guru Sahib was hardly five years Old when he took over Guru Gaddi. Guru Har Krishan Ji is fondly remembered as Child Guru or ‘Child Saint’ due to his tender age at which he became the eighth Guru of the Sikhs.

The main events of the period of Guru Har Krishan Ji are described as follows:
1. A meeting with Brahmin Lai Chand: Guru Har Krishan Ji was a very intelligent child. Guru Sahib had intuitive power with mystic awareness. It is a part of oral history that Guru Sahib onCe met a Brahmin called Lai Chand. Hie Brahmin, Lai Chand was very proud of his knowledge. Lai Chand tried to put questions to Guru Sahib on the contents of Gita with the aim of testing his intellect. Guru Sahib answered all his queries in such an intelligent and mature manner that the Brahman was very astonished and was left speechless.

2. Hostility of Ram Rai. Guru Har Krishan Ji faced the hostility of his dissatisfied brother Ram Rai. Ram Rai was confident of succeeding to the Guru Gaddi on being the eldest son of Guru Har Rai Ji, the seventh Guru. He was not ready to compromise with the loss of his claim over Guru Gaddi, which he himself had lost due to his cowardice. Hence, he prayed to Aurangzeb for justice. Aurangzeb was busy in suppressing the revolts against his rule at that time. He, at first, therefore, did pot give any importance to the pleadings of Ram Rai but; after some time he tried to exploit the conflict between the estranged brothers with the aim of crushing the Sikh movement. Aurangzeb called Guru Har Krishan Ji to Delhi to present the proof of his right to Guru Gaddi.

3. Guru Har Kishan Ji at Delhi. Guru Har Kishan Ji continued to spread the message of Sikh religion and reached Delhi. Guru Har Kishan Ji stayed in the house of Mirza Raja Jai Singh. The house of Mirza Raja Jai Singh was six miles away from the Red Fort of Delhi in a village Raisina. In order to test the proverbial intelligence of the young Guru Sahib, Jai Singh hid his chief queen among his female servants who were wearing similar dresses. He requested Guru Sahib to take his seat in the lap of the chief queen. Guru Sahib looked at all the women and located the chief queen, and sat in her lap. Mirza Raja Jai Singh was astonished to watch the talent of observation of young Guru Sahib. The Gurudwara Bangla Sahib now stands there in his memory.

4. Final Union with the Divine Power. Guru Har Kishan Ji suffered an attack of small pox. Guru Sahib had learnt from intuition that he would soon leave for his final journey. Guru Sahib asked for a coconut and five paisas, circled them thrice, and spoke, “Baba Bakala”. Just after giving his last message, Guru Sahib merged himself with the Divine Power. It was on March 30, 1664, when Guru Sahib gave his last message. Gurudwara Bala Sahib stands on the banks of river Yamuna in his memory.

Question 11.
Describe the travels of Malwa undertaken by Guru Teg Bahadur Ji.
Answer:
Guru Teg Bahadur Ji started his tour of Malwa region in 1673. Guru Sahib’s wife Mata Gujari and his son Gobind Ji also accompanied him.
1. Guru Sahib made his first stop at Saifabad. It was his second visit to this place. The people of Saifabad gave a warm welcome to Guru Sahib. They arranged for the stay of Guru Sahib and his family in a fortress. Guru Sahib stayed there for three months. When Guru Sahib left the place for onward journey, Saifudin presented a strong horse to Guru Sahib and a camel buggy for Mata Gujari Ji.

2. After leaving Saifabad, Guru Teg Bahadur Ji visited villages and cities situated in Malwa and Bangar regions of Punjab. According to one scholar, Guru Sahib visited ten places. The main places, which Guru Sahib visited were Mulowal, Khiyala, Maund, Talwandi Sabo, Bhatinda, etc. All these places have Gurudwaras in the memory of the visit of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji. Guru Sahib got dug a well at Mulowal in order to overcome the scarcity of water in the region. Other villages, which Guru Sahib visited were quite backward in many respects. Guru Sahib helped those villages to overcome their hardships. Guru Sahib toured those regions from 1673 to 1675 and spread the message of Sikh religion among the people.

Effects: The tours of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji immensely influenced the people of the Malwa region.

  • The landlords of Malwa region started treating the farmers humanly under the influence of the polite nature of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji.
  • Guru Sahib had established many centres of religious preaching at different places. His impressive personality and sweet voice swayed the people of the region and they adopted Sikh religion.
  • A new awareness came among the people of the region due to his religious discourses. They were imbued with new religious fervour and became fearless and courageous. The rising enthusiasm and unity among his Sikh followers started giving nightmares and headaches to the Mughal administration.

PSEB 10th Class Social Science Guide Guru Nanak Dev Ji and his Teachings Important Questions and Answers

Answer the following questions in one line or one word:

Question 1.
What was the earlier name of Guru Angad Dev Ji?
Answer:
The earlier name of Guru Angad Dev Ji was Bhai Lehna.

Question 2.
What was the name of the father of Bhai Lehna (Guru Angad Dev Ji)?
Answer:
The name of the father of Bhai Lehna (Guru Angad Dev Ji) was Pheruman.

Question 3.
To whom was Bhai Lehna married?
Answer:
Bhai Lehna (Guru Angad Dev Ji) was married to Bibi Khivi.

Question 4.
Who had established the Udasi Sect?
Answer:
Baba Sri Chand, the elder son of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, established the Udasi Sect.

Question 5.
Which place was the centre of religious activities of Guru Angad Dev Ji?
Answer:
Khadoor Sahib in Amritsar district.

Question 6.
Where was Guru Amar Das Ji born and when?
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji was born in 1479 A.D. in Village Basarke in district Amritsar.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 7.
Describe one difficulty which Guru Amar Das Ji faced on occupying Guru Gaddi.
Answer:
He was faced with the opposition of Bhai Dattu and Bhai Dasu.

Question 8.
How many children did Guru Amar Das Ji have?
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji had two sons and two daughters.

Question 9.
How many steps were constructed in the Baoli (Large Well) at Goindwal?
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji constructed 84 steps in the Baoli at Goindwal.

Question 10.
Which Guru Sahib had started Manji system?
Answer:
Guru Amar Dass Ji started the Manji system.

Question 11.
Write about any one major contribution of Guru Amar Das Ji for the spread of Sikh religion.
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji completed the construction of Goindwal.

Question 12.
Which three festivals were selected by Guru Amar Das Ji for the Sikh community to celebrate?
Answer:
Baisakhi, Maghi, and Diwali.

Question 13.
When did Guru Amar Das Ji make the final union with the Divine power?
Answer:
Guru Amar Dass Ji made the final union with Divine Power in 1574.

Question 14.
Who had made the Guru Gaddi hereditary?
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji declared that after Guru Ram Das Ji, the Guru Gaddi will be hereditary.

Question 15.
What was the name of the wife of Guru Ram Das Ji?
Answer:
The name of the wife of Guru Ram Das Ji was Bibi Bhani.

Question 16.
Write about anyone important contribution made by Guru Ram Das Ji for the spread of Sikh religion.
Answer:
Guru Ram Das Ji founded and developed the holy city of Amritsar.

Question 17.
What WAS the earlier name of the holy city of Amritsar?
Answer:
The earlier name of the holy city of Amritsar was Ramdaspur.

Question 18.
Write the names Of two Sarovars (Large ponds) constructed by Guru Ram Das.JL.
Answer:
Guru Ram Das Ji got dug two Sarovars namely, Santokhsar and Amritsar.

Question 19.
By, what name did the bazaar founded by Guru Ram Das Ji around Amritsar become famous?
Answer:
“Guru ka Bazaar”.

Question 26.
When was Guru Arjan Dey Ji born and where?
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji was born on April 15, 1563 A.D. at Goindwal.

Question 21.
Why did. Guru Bam Das Ji not consider Bhai Prithi Chand worthy of succession to Guru Gaddi lifter him?
Answer:
Bhai Prithi Chand was a cheat, greedy and intriguer.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 22.
Describe any one difficulty which Guru Arjan Dev Ji encountered on coming to Guru Gaddi.
Answer:
Gum Sahib fa|ed animosity and opposition of his eldest brother Bhai Prithia.

Question 23.
Write the nime of Guru Sahib who w§s the first martyr.
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji.

Question 24.
Write any ode effect of the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
Answer:
The martyrdona of Guru Arjan Dev Ji provoked the Sikhs to rise in arms.

Question 25.
Which tyro nerSOns had assisted Guru Arjan Dey Ji in the execution of his plans for the construction of Sri Harmandir Sahib?’
Answer:
Bhai Buddha Ji and Bhai Gurdas Ji.

Question 26.
When was the Construction of Sri Harmandir Sahib completed?
Answer:
In 1601A.D.

Question 27.
Which three cities were founded by Guru Arjan Dev Ji?
Answer:
Guru. Arjan Dev Ji’ laid the foundations of Tam Taran, Hargobindpur, and Kattarpur.

Question 28.
What were the Representatives of Guru Arjan Dev Ji called?
Answer:
The representatives of Guru Arjan Dev Ji were called the Masands.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 29.
Who Completed the work of compilation of ‘Adi Granth Sahib’?
Answer:
Guru Arjari Dev Ji.

Question 30.
Where was Adi Granth Sahib placed?
Answer:
Adi Granth Sahib was placed in Sri Harmandir Sahib at Amritsar.

Question 31.
How many hymns of Guru Nanak Dev Ji have been included in Adi Granth sahib
Answer:
976 Hymns.

Question 32.
From whom did Guru Hargobind Ji receive the training in the use of arms and knowledge of religion?
Answer:
Bhai Buddha Ji.

Question 33.
Write any one cause for the adoption of “New Policy’’ by Guru Hargobind
Answer:
For self-defence of the Sikh community.

Question 34.
Which four places emerged as sacred cities for the Sikh religion by the time of Guru Hargobind Ji?
Answer:
Goindwal, Amritsar, Tam Taran, and Kartarpur.

Question 35.
Which four Sikh institutions had played a major role in the consolidation and progress of Sikh religion?
Answer:
The institutions of Pangat, Sarigat Manji System and Massand System.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 36.
Write the names of any four Commanders of Guru Hargobind Ji.
Answer:
Bhai Bidhi Chand, Bhai Pheru, Bhai Jetha and Bhai Paindal

Question 37.
Which two singers were instructed by Guru/Hargobind Ji to sing heroic songs (via rasa) on high notes in his, presence?.
Answer:
Nathamal and Abdullah.

Question 38.
Write any one cause which resulted the confinement of Guru Hargobind Ji.
Answer:
Jahangir was irritated by his New Policy

Question 39.
Why was the title of “Band! ciihor Baba” (a holy deliverer) given to Guru Hargobind Ji?
Answer:
Gum Sahib got released 52 Rajput chiefs imprisoned in the Gwalior Fort

Question 40.
How many battles werefoU’g&tr between the Sikhs and fhfe Mughals during the period of Guru Hargobind Ji?
Answer:
Three battles

Question 41.
Write the names of four main missionary preachers of the period of Guru Hargobind Ji.
Answer:
Almast, Phul, Gonda and BalujHas&an.

Question 42.
Write the name of father of Guru Har Rai Ji.
Answer:
Baba Gurditta Ji.

Question 43.
Write the names of any four new missionary preachers, deputed by Guru Har Rai Ji.
Answer:
Bairagi Bhagat Gir, Bhai Sangt^a, Bhai Gauda and Bhai Bhagtu.

Question 44.
Give the names of three prominent preachers appointed by Guru Har Rai Ji.
Answer:
Bhai Bhagat Bhagwan Ji (Bairagi Bhagat Gir); Bhai Pehru, Bhai Gaudh.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 45.
Where did Guru Har Krishan Ji stay While on his way tb Delhi for preaching?
Answer:
At the house of Mirza Raja Jai Singh.

Fill in the blanks:

Question 1.
Guru Angad Dey Ji collected the teachings of _________ and wrote them in ___________ script.
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji, Gurmukhi

Question 2.
Guru Amar Das Ji constructed a large well _________at _________
Answer:
Baoli, Goindwal

Question 3.
Guru Ram Das Ji constructed a large pond called _________
Answer:
Amritsar

Question 4.
Guru Arjan Dev Ji founded the cities of _________ and _________
Answer:
Taran Taran, Kartarpur

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 5.
Guru Hargobind Sahib put on two swords which he called one of _________ and the other of _________
Answer:
Miri, Piri.

True or False:

Question 1.
Guru Arjan Dev Ji started Manji System.
Answer:
False

Question 2.
Guru Teg Bahadur Ji was the 9th Guru.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
Guru Arjan Dev Ji did not include the hymns of Bhakti saints in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
False

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 4.
Sri Harmandir Sahib is one of the most sacred and important places of pilgrimage for the Sikhs.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
Guru Har Rai Ji did not abandon the policy of war.
Answer:
False

Question 6.
Guru Har Rai Ji nominated Har Krishan Ji successor to Guru Gaddi.
Answer:
True

Question 7.
Guru Teg Bahadur Ji did not visit Assam.
Answer:
False.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
How was the institution of Guru and Sikh (Guru and his follower) established?
Answer:
A brotherhood of Sikh community had been fully evolved before the final union of Guru Nanak Dev Ji with the Divine Power. Guru Nanak Dey Ji took special care to perpetuate the Sikh community. Guru Sahib appointed his most devoted follower Bhai Lehna as his successor before he breathed his last. Bhai Lhna ascended the Guru Gaddi under the name Guru Angad Dey Ji after the final union of Guru Nanak Dey Ji with the

Divine Power. In this manner, Guru Sikh tradition was evolved and gradual it was firmly established. The tradition of Guru Panth (Guruship of Guru Gaddi) became the most revered institution in the history of the Sikh religion.

Question 2.
Why had Guru Nanak Dev Ji appointed Bhai Lehna to Guru Gaddi in place of his own sons by completely setting aside their claims?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dey Ji had two sons, named Baba Sri Chand and Baba Lakhmi Das. Guru Sahib did not appoint either of them W Guru Gaddi. Guru Sahib preferred to appoint his devoted follower Bhai Lehna as his successor to Guru Gaddi. Guru Sahib had special reasons to turn down the claims of his sons to Guru Gaddi, which were as follow:
1. A perfect householder’s life for a Sikh was one of the important principles of the teachings of Guru Nanak Dey Ji. However, Baba Sri Chand was an ascetic and Baba Lakhmi Das was too worldly. On the other hand, Bhai Lehna had sincerely followed the teachings of Guru Nanak Dcv Ji and lived a life of a perfect householder.

2. The humility and service to the Guru with complete devotion were the core principles of the creed of Guru Nanak Dcv Ji. Baba Sri Chand was devoid of these very qualities in his personality. On the other hand, Bhai Lehna was a perfect model of humility and complete surrender to Guru Sahib.

3. Guru Nanak Dev Ji did not believe in the superiority of the Vedas, Shashtras and the Brahmin class. Guru Sahib did not consider Sanskrit as a sacred language. However, Baba Sri Chand Ji had deep faith in Sanskrit language, the Vedas and the Shastras.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 3.
Describe the position of Langar System and its importance during the period of Guru Angad Dev Ji.
Answer:
The expansion and promotion of the Langar System by Guru Angad Dev Ji had beneficial results. The Langar System became an important and effective method of propagation of Sikh religion. Secondly, it turned up as an institution for the shelter of the poor people and thirdly, it became a powerful agency for preaching and popularity of the principles of Sikh religion. There were already numerous similar institutions that worked on charity of some individuals but Langar system was probably the first institution of its own kind which depended on. the collective donations and gifts of the whole Sikh community. It ended the feelings of high and low rooted in the principles of caste system and inculcated the feelings of unity and brotherhood among the members of the Sikh community.

Question 4.
Which incident of the period of Guru Angad Dev Ji revealed Guru Sahib as a strict disciplinarian?
Answer:
Guru Angad Dev Ji set an effective example of discipline in the Sikh community for his devotees. According to the oral history, there were two famous players of Rabab (a string musical instrument) named. Satta and Balwant in the service of Guru Sahib. Both of them became proud of their artistic skills and started overlooking the instructions of Guru Sahib. They also started boasting that the popularity of Guru Sahib was due to their mastery over ragas and way of singing of the Guru Bani. They even went to the extent of claiming that the popularity of Guru Nanak Dev Ji was due to the melodies of Mardana. Guru Sahib banished them from his place due to their indiscipline and overbearing attitude. However, on the pleading of his devoted follower Bhai Laddha, Guru Sahib pardoned them. It left a deep impression on the minds of the Sikhs. Consequently, the importance of discipline was honoured in Sikh religion very strictly.

Question 5.
How did Guru Amar Das Ji become the follower of Guru Angad Dev Ji? How had Guru Amar Das Ji received the Guru Gaddi?
Answer:
Before adopting Sikh religion, Bhai Amar Das, one day, got a chance to listen to divine Bani of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, which was being sung by Bibi Amro, the daughter of Guru Angad Dev Ji. Guru Amar Das Ji was so impressed and captivated by the divine hymns that he immediately sought the audience of Guru Angad Dev Ji and adopted Guru Angad Dev Ji as his Guru. From then onwards, Guru Amar Das Ji stayed with Guru Angad Dev Ji at Khadoor Sahib from 1541 to 1552 and devoted himself completely to the service of Guru Angad Dev Ji. During the chilly winter of Punjab plains, Bhai Amar Das Ji used to fetch water in an earthen pitcher from the river Beas for the bath of Guru Angad Dev Ji early in the morning.

Once on his way back to Guru Sahib’s house, Bhai Amar Das Ji stepped on a thorn and stumbled. The pitcher fell making a loud noise. A sleeping woman, a wife of a washerman on the wayside of his path, was awakened from her sleep and lamented with a taunt that the old man might be the homeless Amro. Guru Angad Dev Ji learnt about this episode. Guru Sahib immediately called Bhai Amar Das Ji in his presence and ordained, “From now on Amar Das shall not remain homeless, rather he shall be a shelter to numerous homeless.” In March 1552, Guru Angad Dev Ji appointed Guru Amar Das Ji as his successor. In this way, Guru Amar Das Ji became the third Sikh Guru.

Question 6.
Describe the progress of Langar System during the period of Guru Amar Das Ji.
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji introduced some new rules for Langar system. According to the new rules, no one was expected to join the Sangat of Guru Sahib without partaking food in the Langar. The women, who served in the Langar, were not allowed to observe Purdah. It is said that even Emperor Akbar took food in the Langar following all the rules before meeting Guru Amar Das Ji. The Langar was open to people from all the sections of the society without any consideration of religion, caste and tribe. The Brahmans, Kshatriyas, Vaish, Shudras and people of all other castes sat together and partook food served equally to all. It gave a strong blow to the caste, colour, and racial considerations, which were quite dominating at that time. It developed the feeling of equality among the followers of Guru Sahib. No doubt, Langar system had definitely bound the Sikh community in a common bond of unity and brotherhood and developed the feeling of equality among them thereby.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 7.
Describe the progress of Manji System during the period of Guru Amar Das Ji.
Answer:
Guru Amar Das Ji introduced the Manji System. The number of the Sikhs had increased tremendously by his times. However, Guru Sahib was quite advanced in age and he, therefore, found it difficult to reach his Sikhs spread far and wide in order to preach his teachings. Hence, Guru Sahib divided his religious domain into 22 provinces. Each province was called ‘Manji’. Each ‘Manji’ was further divided into local centres called ‘Piris’. The Manji System played an important part in the history of Sikh religion. G.C. Narang is of the view that the contribution of Guru Sahib Ji to Manji System consolidated the base of Sikh religion and facilitated in a great way the spread of Sikh religion in all parts of the country.

Question 8.
“Guru Amar Das Ji was a great social reformer.” Give any four arguments in support of the above statement.
Answer:

  1. Guru Sahib strongly criticised the principles of Caste system. Guru Sahib declared that the class differences were totally unacceptable to Supreme God. Therefore, no caste or class considerations were observed in Langar System.
  2. The practice of Sati was very common in the times of Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib strongly condemned the evil of Sati.
  3. Guru Sahib also denounced the prevailing Purdah system in very strong terms. Guru Sahib considered Purdah a great hindrance in the growth of society.
  4. Guru Sahib instructed his Sikh followers to keep away from the use of intoxicants.

Question 9.
Write about the contribution of Guru Arjan Dev Ji for the progress of Sikh religion (Panth).
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji was the fifth Guru Sahib of the Sikhs. Guru Sahib had contributed to the progress of the Sikh religion in the following ways:

  1. Guru Sahib completed the construction of Sri Harmandir Sahib in the holy city of Amritsar.
  2. Guru Sahib founded the cities of Tarn Taran and Kartarpur.
  3. Guru Sahib compiled the ‘Adi Granth Sahib’ and placed it in Sri Harmandir Sahib. He appointed Bhai Buddha Ji as the first Chief Granthi of Sri Harmandir Sahib.
  4. The Sikhs made voluntary donations for langar and Guru Ki Golak. But they were uncertain and irregular. Guru Sahib fixed the contribution of Sikh community equivalent to one tenth of its annual income. Guru Sahib also deputed his trusted Sikhs for the collection of donations from his Sikh disciples. Such representatives of Guru Sahib were called the Masands.

Question 10.
What is the importance of the Adi Granth Sahib in the history of the Sikh religion?
Answer:
The compilation of Adi Granth Sahib provided the strong foundation for the Sikh religion. Adi Granth Sahib became the most reliable and holy book of the Sikhs. All the social ceremonies concerning the life of the Sikhs, like birth, marriage, initiation to adulthood, death, etc. were performed in divine presence of the Adi Granth Sahib. The Sikhs who had deep faith in the holiness of Adi Granth Sahib, developed a feeling of being one with the fellow believers, giving rise to class consciousness and ultimately to the rise of a distinct Sikh’Panth. Later, the holy book was raised to the status of Guru itself and the holy book became the Guru of the Sikh religion. The Sikhs and numerous other people believe that the hymns of Guru Granth Sahib are divine utterances.

Question 11.
Write the historical significance of Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Adi Granth Sahib is the holy book of the Sikhs. It was not written with any historic perspective or motive. However, it has great historical importance also. It is one of the major sources of the political, social, religious, economic and cultural history of the 16th and 17th century Punjab. Guru Nanak Dev Ji had severely condemned the rule of Lodhis and oppression of Babur over the people of Punjab in his sayings. It is a source of information about the dominance of caste system, the exploitation of women, and other shortcomings of Indian society like irrational customs, rites and traditions during those days. The religion had lost its sanctity. Guru Nanak Dev Ji had declared “No one is a Hindu or a Muslim,” suggesting that religion had lost its actual meaning and people were treading a wrong path.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 12.
Write down any four causes of the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
Answer:
The circumstances which led to the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji were as follows:

  1. Intolerant Religious policy of Jahangir. Jahangir, the Mughal Emperor, was hostile to Guru Arjan Dev Ji. He was planning to convert him to Islam or to kill him.
  2. The Enmity of Prithia. Guru Ram Dass Ji had appointed Guru Arjan Dev Ji as his successor because Guru Sahib was much impressed with the intelligence and ability of Bhai Arjan Dev Ji. However, Bhai Prithi Chand did not like his decision. Prithi Chand started conspiring against Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
  3. The Grandeur of Guru Arjan Dev Ji’s court. The Guru Sahib held a splendid court. The Sangat had also increased the grandeur of his court and out of their respect and love for him had started addressing him as their “Sacha Padshah”. The Mughal emperor could not tolerate all these developments so he decided to take some severe action against him.
  4. The penalty imposed on Guru Arjan Dev Ji. Jahangir imposed a penalty on Guru Sahib and detained him. The fanaticism of Jahangir crossed all limits and he passed the orders to execute Guru Sahib by inflicting tortures on his person.

Question 13.
What was the reaction against the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji?
Answer:
The martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji caused fundamental changes in the attitude of the Sikhs.
1. Guru Sahib had left a parting message for his son Guru Hargobind that read, “The day is approaching fast when Good and Evil will clash Let him (Guru Hargobind Ji) sit fully armed on the throne and maintain army to the best of his ability.” The last message of Guru Sahib was the starting point of the military policy of the Sikhs. The Sikh religion of ‘Saints’ became the religion of ‘Saint Soldiers’ (Sant Sipahis) with rosary in one hand and a sword in the other.

2. Before the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji, the Sikhs and the Mughals had very cordial relations. However, the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji injured the religious feelings of the Sikhs and they developed ill-will against the Mughal rule in their hearts.

3. The Sikh religion became more popular due to the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. The Sikh followers of Guru Sahib were now all out to sacrifice their lives for the cause of their religion. There is no doubt that the martyrdom of Guru Sahib had given a new direction to the history of Sikh religion.

Question 14.
Write any four important aspects of the personality and character of Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
Answer:
The fifth Guru, Guru Arjan Dev Ji was a man of high character and pleasing manners. The four main aspects of his personality are as under:

  1. Guru Sahib was a successful organizer and religious leader. Guru Sahib vigorously spread the message of Sikh religion and gave an organised form to the Sikh community by making necessary reforms in the Masand System.
  2. Guru Sahib was a great builder. Guru Sahib completed the work of building the city of Amritsar, constructed Sri Harmandir Sahib, and founded cities like Tarn Taran, Hargobindpur etc. Guru Sahib also constructed a Baoli at Lahore.
  3. Guru Sahib completed the work of compilation of Adi Granth Sahib.
  4. Guru Sahib was a great social reformer. Guru Sahib encouraged widow remarriage and checked the use of intoxicants among the Sikhs. Guru Sahib also established a centre where free medicines and clothes were provided to the sick.

Question 15.
Name any four cailses which forced Guru Hargobind Ji to adopt the “New Policy”.
Answer:
1. Hostility and Interference of the Mughals. The Mughal Emperor Jahangir adopted the policy of oppression towards Sikhs after the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. Consequently, it became necessary for the next Guru Sahib, Guru Hargobind Ji to adopt New Policy for the defence of the Sikh religion.

2. The martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. It became clear to the Sikhs after the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji that they had to bear the arms along with the rosaries for the protection of Sikh religion. Hence, Guru Hargobind Ji adopted the New Policy with the same aim in view.

3. Parting Message of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. In his last message, Guru Arjan Dev Ji had instructed the Sikhs to bear arms. Hence, Guru Hargobind Ji started imparting the training in arms along with spiritual knowledge to the Sikhs.

4. Entry of the Jats in Sikhism. Guru Hargobind Ji was encouraged to adopt the new policy on the entry of Jats in the Sikh religion. The Jats were freedom loving by nature and had great aptitude for fighting battles.

Question 16.
Write briefly the contribution of Guru Hargobind Ji to Sikhism.
Answer:

  1. Guru Sahib put on two swords when he occupied Guru Gaddi. One sword represented his Miri and the other his Piri. With that, Guru Sahib became the political leader as well as a religious guide of the Sikhs.
  2. Guru Sahib also erected a new building near Sri Harmandir Sahib. The new building is called Akal Takh’t. Guru Sahib imparted the training in arms to the Sikhs.
  3. Jahangir imprisoned Guru Hargobind Ji in the fort of Gwalior. Soon after, he learnt that he had taken a wrong decision. He released Guru Sahib. However, Guru Sahib persuaded Jahangir to release all the Rajput kings imprisoned in the Gwalior fort.
  4. Guru Sahib also fought battles with the Mughals. The Mughal emperor Shahjahan sent army against Guru Sahib three times. Guru Sahib fought against them very bravely. The Mughal army lost all three battles.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 17.
Write any four contributions of Guru Har Rai Ji to the Sikh religion.
Answer:

  1. Guru Sahib regularly organised religious meetings in the morning as well as in the evening everyday for spreading the message of Sikh religion. Guru Sahib encouraged people to adopt a religious way of life.
  2. Guru Sahib converted many people to Sikh religion. The prominent among them were: Bairagi Bhagat Gir, Bhai Sangtia, Bhai Gauda, and Bhai Bhagtu.
  3. Guru Sahib deputed Sikh preachers to spread the message of the Sikh religion to distant places. One of his prominent preachers, who was earlier a Bairagi Sadhu became his follower. He changed his name from Bhagat Gir to Bhagat Bhagwan. He established 360 centres (gaddis). Some of those centres are still active.
  4. Guru Sahib himself actively preached the message of Sikh religion in different parts of the Punjab.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Describe the circumstances which were responsible for the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji was one of those great saints of the world who sacrificed their lives for the sake of their religion. The circumstances which were responsible for the martyrdom of Guru Sahib were as follow:
1. Fanaticism of Jahangir. Jahangir became the Mughal Emperor in 1605. He hated the Sikhs. He had similar feelings for Guru Arjan Dev Ji. He wanted that either Guru Sahib should become a Musalman or else be put to death. He definitely played a big role in the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji.

2. Hostility of Prithia. Guru Ram Das Ji had appointed Guru Arjan Dev Ji as his successor to Guru Gaddi because Guru Sahib was convinced of his intelligence and ability. Prithia, the elder brother of Guru Arjan Dev Ji, did not relish the decision of Guru Ram Das Ji. Then Prithia started conspiring against Guru Arjan Dev Ji in league with the governor of Punjab and his finance minister Chandu Shah. It is true that Prithia had died before the martyrdom of Guru Sahib but it was he who had done the maximum damage to Sikh religion by infusing hatred in the hearts of Mughals against Guru Arjan Dev Ji.

3. Splendour of Guru Arjan Dev Ji’s Court. The Sikhs had grown rich by the blessings of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. The Sangat set up a magnificent court for Guru Sahib, where Guru Sahib continued with his religious activities. The Sangat started addressing Guru Sahib as “Sachcha Padshah” out of love and devotion for him. Jahangir could not tolerate the rising strength of Sikh community within his empire. Hence, the Emperor decided to act against Guru Sahib.

4. Case of Prince Khusro. Khurso, the eldest son of Emperor Jahangir, was once even considered for succession to the throne of Mughal Empire by Akbar himself. Prince Khusro revolted against his father Emperor Jahangir. The Mughal army chased him. Khurso came to Punjab and sought shelter with Guru Sahib whom he considered as a friend of his grandfather Akbar. Guru Sahib, a saintly figure, expressed good wishes for Khusro. However, the Mughal Emperor took this act of Guru Sahib as a political offence and decided to sentence Guru Ji to death.

5. Hostility of Chandu Shah. Chandu Shah was a high ranking official of the Mughal administration in Punjab. Guru Arjan Dev Ji had declined to marry the daughter of Chandu Shah to his own son on the suggestion of Sikh Sangat. Chandu Shah felt insulted and tried to instigate Akbar against Guru Sahib with the motive of taking revenge. Akbar held Guru Sahib in high esteem and considered himself as a friend of Guru Sahib. Akbar did not give any importance to the grumbling of Chandu Shah. Chandu Shah did not stop conspiring against Guru Sahib. After the death of Akbar, Chandu Shah instigated Jahangir and convinced him that Guru Sahib had helped the rebellious Prince Khusro. Jahangir had already decided to end the religious movement of Guru Sahib. The instigation by Chandu Shah further provoked Jahangir to take a strong step against Guru Sahib.

6. Compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib. Guru Arjan Dev Ji had compiled the Adi Granth Sahib. The enemies of Guru Sahib told Jahangir that Guru Sahib had included such matter in the holy book which was against Islam. Jahangir asked Guru Sahib to remove all such matter from Adi Granth Sahib, which was supposed to be against Islam. Guru Sahib clearly told Jahangir that he was not going to delete anything from the Adi Granth Sahib as there was no such matter in it which could be considered against any religion. Then Jahangir proposed to Guru Sahib to add something in Adi Granth Sahib in praise of Prophet Muhammad. Guru Sahib refused to oblige Jahangir and told him that nothing could be incorporated in the Adi Granth except as directed by the Divine Voice itself. Jahangir was infuriated by such a reply.

7. Penalty imposed on Guru Sahib. The religious fanaticism of Jahangir reached its peak due to the reasons given above. Jahangir issued an order to put Guru Sahib to death by torture. Later, he changed his own orders and asked the Guru Sahib to pay a penalty of two lakh rupees. Guru Sahib refused to pay even a single paisa as penalty and claimed that all the money with him was meant only for the poor and orphans. Jahangir was enraged and again issued orders for the torture and execution of Guru Sahib.

Martyrdom. Guru Sahib was subjected to horrible physical torture. Guru Sahib was made to sit on red-hot iron plate and then hot sand was poured on his body. Guru Sahib was also made to enter boiling water. Finally, in May 1606 Guru Sahib was martyred. According to Sikh scholars, when Guru Sahib was being tortured, one day Guru Sahib expressed a desire to take bath in a river. When Guru Sahib entered the river Ravi, he suddenly disappeared.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Question 2.
Discuss the importance of martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
Answer:
The martyrdom of Guru Arjun Dev Ji had far reaching effects on the history of Sikhism.

  1. The martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji gave birth to militant spirit among the Sikhs.
    The Sikh community was transformed into a sect of aggressive fighters for the cause of religion from being a community of pious and peace loving people. They had been transformed into Sant Sipahis.
  2. Earlier, the Mughals and the Sikhs had very cordial relations but the martyrdom of Guru Sahib had hurt their religious sentiments and they became the bitter enemies of the Mughal rule.
  3. The martyrdom of Guru Sahib raised the prestige and popularity of the Sikh religion. The Sikhs were bent upon the protection of their religion by all means.

Indeed, the martyrdom of Guru Sahib turned a new leaf in the history of Sikh religion. It transformed peace-loving saintly Sikhs into Sant Sipahis. “The martyrdom of Guru Sahib convinced the Sikhs that they must arm themselves and fight if they want to live.”

Question 3.
Describe the circumstances which were responsible for the martyrdom of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji. What is the importance of his martyrdom in the history of Sikh religion?
Answer:
The following circumstances (causes) were responsible for the martyrdom of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji:
1. Increase in the tension between the Mughals and the Sikhs. The relations between the Mughals and the Sikhs were quite cordial during the reign of Emperor Akbar but they became bitter enemies of each other during the reign of Emperor Jahangir. Jahangir had martyred Guru Arjan Dev Ji. The Sikhs had, as a result, rose in arms for the protection of their religion. It created much bitterness between the Mughals and the Sikhs which ultimately resulted in the martyrdom of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji in the reign of Aurangzeb.

2. Intolerant Religious Policy of Aurangzeb. Aurangzeb was a fanatic Sunni Muslim. He had started suppressing his Hindu subjects and imposed numerous restrictions on them. He tried to convert them to Islam forcibly. The oppression perpetrated by Aurangzeb on his innocent and weak subjects moved the heart of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji and Guru Sahib resolved to save humanity from the atrocities of the fanatic ruler which resulted in the martyrdom of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji. It was the second martyrdom in the history of Sikh religion.

3. Propagation of Sikh Religion. Guru Teg Bahadur Ji, following the footsteps of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, propagated the message of Sikh religion by undertaking extensive tours in different regions of India. Aurangzeb could not tolerate the rising popularity of Sikh religion. Aurangzeb developed jealousy in his heart against Guru Sahib.

4. Hostility of Ram Rai. It was complained that Ram Rai, the elder brother of Guru Har Rai Ji projected the religious activities of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji as against the Mughal rule. This led Aurangzeb to summon Guru Sahib to Delhi to justify his religious activities and it resulted in the martyrdom of Guru Sahib.

5. Appeals of Kashmiri Brahmins. The condition of the Kashmiri Brahmans had become miserable due to the oppression of Muslim rulers. The governor of Kashmir was trying to convert Kashmiri Brahmans to Islam forcibly. The Kashmiri Brahmans appealed to Guru Sahib for protection. Guru Sahib was moved by the miseries of the Brahmans and found that the situation demanded a big sacrifice for the protection of religion.

Guru Sahib advised Kashmiri Brahmans to convey his following message to Aurangzeb:
“Guru Teg Bahadur, the ninth Sikh Guru is seated on the throne of Great Guru Nanak, who is the protector of the Hindu faith and religion. First make him a Musalman and then all the people, including ourselves, will, of our own accord, adopt your faith.”

The Kashmiri Brahmans conveyed the message of Guru Sahib to the fanatic Mughal ruler. Guru Sahib decided to visit Delhi. The Mughals martyred Guru Sahib in Delhi.

Importance. The martyrdom of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji is very important in the history of Sikh religion. The following points may reveal its significance:

  1. Maintained the Tradition of Sacrifices for Religion. Guru Teg Bahadur Ji maintained the tradition of Guru Sahibans to sacrifice their lives for the protection of religion by setting example of his own martyrdom.
  2. Led to the Creation of the Khalsa. Guru Gobind Singh Ji learned from the martyrdom of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji that the religious oppression by the Mughals would not end as long as they were ruling over India. The only answer was to destroy their rule. Guru Gobind Singh Ji created Khalsa at Anandpur Sahib in 1699 to end the oppression of the Mughals.
  3. Feelings of hatred and revenge against the Mughals, The whole Punjab was filled with feelings of hatred and revenge against the Mughal rule because of the martyrdom of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji.
  4. Gave a Fatal blow to the Mughal Empire. The martyrdom of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji gave a fatal blow to the very existence of the Mughal Empire. The Khalsa of Guru Gobind Singh Ji continued to struggle bravely against the Mughal Empire and ultimately destroyed its existence in Punjab.

PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji

Activity:

Question 1.
Show the main historical places of Punjab in the given map of Punjab.
Answer:
PSEB 10th Class SST Solutions History Chapter 4 Contribution of Sikh Gurus from Sri Guru Angad Dev Ji to Sri Guru Teg Bahadur Ji 1